Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit M99-0083 - SOUTHCENTER MALL - RENOVATION
M99 -0083 633 Southcenter Mall Southcenter Mall Renovation City of Tukwila (206) 431 -3670 Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 MECHANICAL PERMIT Permit No: M99 -0083 Type: B -MECH Category: NRES Address: 633 SOUTHCENTER MALL Location: Parcel #: 262304 -9023 Contractor License No: BAYLECG034JC Status: ISSUED Issued: 09/29/1999 Expires: 03/27/2000 TENANT SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION Phone: 633 SOUTHCENTER MALL, TUKWILA, WA 98188 OWNER SOUTHCENTER JOINT VENTURE ATTN: JAMES J GUDIN, 25425 CENTER RIDGE RD, CLEVELAND OH 44145 CONTACT DAVID SIRCOLOUMB Phone: 206 - 971 -5546 414 OLIVE, #500, SEATTLE WA 98101 CONTRACTOR BAYLEY CONSTRUCTION GEN. PTNSHP Phone: 206- 621 -8884 PO BOX 4549, SEATTLE, WA 98104 ******************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Permit Description: INSTALL (2) NEW HVAC UNITS AT MAIN ENTRANCE WITH DUCTWORK. UMC Edition: 1997 Valuation: Total Permit Fee: 100,000.00 29.38 * * ** *,************r,*****.****** k*********** * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Per r t Center u`thorized Signature Date I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this building permit. Signature:_ ,�� _ �;1C Date: 412-c1 1c Print Name : _ Q F'e,t.0 l Title: Ft eGA- E^ ,k'e'0e This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. TY 'OF TUKielLA Address: ,633 01..11-HCENIEP MALL Permit ,N,:.!. M99-0053 •SUite:• . Yenant7: SOUT1I4 E141EP MALL PEMOVATION• . ' • Status;ASSUED rypet B-MECH . ' Applied: 04/19/1999 ••• Pct?! #: .262304-9023 ,. . . fssued:, 09/2§11999 ***4***k4,41.****kkhkil.4**WkkhitkA****4**kkifek*k****k*kb4P*hkkk*M4rkk4kA*kkA44,4k PerMtt Conditions: 1, Mo chandes will bb made to the plans unless approved by the, lEn9ineer and the A11 permits. inspect).on„reCOeds„-and*a4kOved plans shall:be -,available at thejob.:•site prior to the Startof,any con- Struction, TheSedOcumentsi,are t 1 maintainedand ;able until fjnal.'inspectionatioroVal is 4ranted'. 2 :A11 construotion.tpbe ConfOrmante,:wisth aPOr.oved , :plans ang...:et:tuirem,eti,ts of the,Uniform Sciid09.Code,(499./ .Editionas amended: UntfOrm:Mechanical, Code (1997-Edit'ion).. and Wash1n9ton State Ener9v 'Code •(1997 Edition)-, VaridYtY of Permit,- The isSuanOe of a permit or approvaLof olans:,-'specifications. andcomputations stroed:to.be a permit,,for. or an:aporoval of. aiiy of any of the prov,isions of the'..buildind code or'Of nv the ordinance of tne'jurisdiction, No permit presiiMing to 90,ie•:authoyity to Opl.ateThr.canceLthe orovisionsofHthis code shall h vali'd. S. MahOfacturers instalIationHintrlici-Aclitsre'euh'ed on site for,the-building inspectors'creview, • • CITY OF 1 'KWILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Miscellaneous Permit Application' Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mall or facsimile. Project Name/Tenante,/,( fel/Of/ 0/1 Value of Construction: j /00 000S Site Address: & ;,. et , J 7 u k Lv Cl l� ity /State /Zip: �(t/( � / } Tax Parcel Number: Property Owner: i t i2icLiR� -v( �q�4s ��v� Phone: 4ctd - SF1 -1-$ ae Street Address: �j- e G, / City gte �-/ (CV `e(�j' Fax #: 44,0 .. g D b r ‘1 01 j Contact Person: (///// c)ketilt) WA ' 'T5 Phone: Street Address: A /A awe_ #s--ez) Gr=o g, ! ��Citya y1 /i p:, Fax #: r� _ / 1 2/ ^ 13 / Contractor: /.z,,, , . Q!A 69 SyLt'Z7 // vr� Ll • P. Phone: 70 • (Oo f ' 2 eel- Street Address: ZesS c/v __ _%i4 c.f. %cEok/ /'4ity. S e/7O4. Fax #: .726, _ 313_7.72 1 Phone: Architect: ,n„ .1/f p /1111 Gfk, Street Address: 414 h// Sap - �r ity Sta" /, i•:/ l/ Fax # :2� , ' w Engineer: ctolev 1 �'%evs LL , Phone: �� ` 2e s_- 24 r fv Street Address: , �f`. n City S - to /Zi•: Fax #: a %/(1 C j/ MISCELLANEOUS PERMIT REVIEW AND APPROVAL REQUESTED: (TO BE FILLE©OUT BYAPPL'ICANT) ,. Description of work to be done: 2) nen/ ,C aeds 0 "Ham �ti �Ce (/ 0v G{�(/ Will there be storage of flammable /combustible hazardous material in the building? ❑ yes �no Attach list of materials and storage location on se•arate 8 1/2 X 11 •a•erindicatin. •uantit :s & Material Safet Data Sheets ■ ove Ground Tanks ■ Antennas /Satellite Dishes ■ Puikhead /Docks C Commercial Roroof L7 Demolition El Fence ©'Mechanical ❑ Manufactured Housing- Replacement only ❑ Parking Lots ❑ Retaining Walls ❑ Temporary Pedestrian Protection /Exit Systems ❑ Temporary Facilities ❑ Tree Cutting APPLICANTAEQUEST FOR MISCELLANEOUS PUBLIC WORKS:PERMITS:. ❑ Channelization /Striping ❑ Curb cut/Access /Sidewalk ❑ Fire Loop /Hydrant (main to vault) #: Size(s): ❑ Flood Control Zone ❑ Land Altering: 0 Cut cubic yards 0 Fill cubic yards 0 sq. ft.grading /clearing ❑ Landscape Irrigation ❑ Sanitary Side Sewer ft: ❑ Sewer Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public in Storm Drainage ❑ Street Use ❑ Water Main Extension 0 Private 0 Public ❑ Water Meter /Exempt # Size(s): 0 Deduct 0 Water Only ❑ Water Meter /Permanent # Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp # Size(s): Est, quantity: gal Schedule: ❑ Miscellaneous ❑ Moving Oversized Load/Hauling MONTHLY SERVICE BILLINGS TO: ' ` Name: /O Phone: Address':` City /State /Zip: 0 Water 0 Sewer 0 Metro 0 Standby WATER METER DEPOSIT /REFUND BILLING: Name: Phone: Address: City /State /Zip: Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. Dat�gplicat acc �t��//l1 /l II -' II (( Date app atio ere!: �c Appl`= gken by: (initials) MISCPMT.DOC 7/11/96 ALL MISCELLANEOUS P , ' IT APPLICATIONS MUST BE SUBII • ED WITH THE FOLLOWING: ➢ ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN ➢ BUILDING SITE PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED ➢ ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED ARCHITECT ➢ STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ➢ CIVIL/SITE PLAN DRAWINGS REQUIRE STAMP BY WASHINGTON LICENSED CIVIL ENGINEER (P.E.) • SUBMIT APPLICATION AND REOUIRED CHECKLISTS FOR Above Ground Tanks/Water.:Tanks - Supported directly upon grade exceeding,5;000 gallons and.a ratio•of freight to diameter or width which exceeds 2 :1 PERMIT REVIEW SUbmitcl ecklist o :. M-9 • " 4i Antennas /Sateliit@ Dishes $4 Submit checklist ,µ No M -1 E Awnings /Canopies:, No signage Commercial Tenant Improvement ,Permit. • LJ Bulkhead/Dock . .., Submit checklist • . No :, M -10 r Commercial >Reroof. • Submit checklist ' No M -6 71 Demolition' Submit checklist; No: M =3; M =3a- O Fences'- Over 6 feetiin :Height Submit checklist: No M =9` 0 Land Altering /Grading /Preloads: Submit checklist No M -2 0 Loading :Do'cks Cornmetcial.Tenantimprovement Permit. `Submit checklist No :. : H -17 O Mechanical'(Residentiei' &Commercial) r ' • , Submit checklist No M43;, , Residential :only H+6, H-16 - D' MlicellaneoW PublioWorks- Permits:`. •' •" ',Submit checklist No: H 9 0 Manufactured Housing (RED INSIGNIA ONLY) Submit checklist No M=5, ' Moving Oversuzed.Load/Hauling > Submit checklist : No M-5 0 Parking Lots . , Submit checklist No: M -4 Residential'Reroof Exempt with following exception: if roof structure to be repaired,or.replaced ' Residential Building Permit Submit checklist No: M-6 0 Retaining Walls- Over 4 feet in height Submit checklist No M1' 0 Temporary Facilities Submit checklist No M -7 0 TemporaryPedestrian Protection/Exit'Systems Submit checklist No M =4, 0 Tree Cutting' Submit checklist : No M -2 Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If not available at the time of application, a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued, unless the homeowner will be the builder OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Bullding:Owner /Author /zed Agent If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer , :or contractorlii'ensed: by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the properly,owner authorizing the agent to submit this: permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT 1 HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUjffAGENT: Signature: i�v/cw..- Date: 1//m h, / Print name: u« : ea �! f� �l . "// Phone: _206 6 ,2( -.166 Fax #: :,706 3 y3.774 Address: 20/� Gam- b "f gox City/Neste/Zip: 444 `yeid i MISCPMT.DOC 7/11/96 77,71.rr71177.";""" fr***A.**A 11Y OF TUKWILA, WA °1-0(— T RAMMII i******—Ak****4*.**kA****.k*A***A***..vAAA***A*It'****A4****A**Alr**.., TRAN8MIT Number: P9000159 Amount: 29.08.09/29/99 ,,Pilvment Method: CHECg Notqtion: OAYLEY CUNSTRUCT Init: r'nEfFrfr Pe: mit No: M99-0083 Noer 13-MECH • MECHANICAL PERMI1 PRroel No: 262304-9020 8)te Addrei.iq: b33 8OUI•CENIER MALL iotal Feet:: ;19. 0 0 IN :OCD 29.38 'fig's, Parlme,nt 29.38 lotvl (..1 PliltS4 24.1(8 TOTAL 29.38 Halance: .00 CHECK 29.30 I, 4.. * 4 * it 11 * -1r A 7+ * A 4 •A ..4 i it 4 * * at i •A * * * A * It iv A * * * * * * * it i, A /, A 4 Or le ic * A * 0. A li 1c A 4, .A. it 4t i t DUE Ma Accouot Code Desi;r1otlon Amoun: CASH 0.10 000/:-.:4ti,t400 PLAN CHEC3 - NOMItES; t).,8t. CHANGE 0.02 000/322 . 100 MECHANICAL - t1OI11 3 • 20.50 • .6 L,■4'6,"Zi 09/29/99 • 1429 0097 j� ;.• 7423 CITY o TUKWILA • INSPECT ION NO. INSPECTION RECO .1C ) Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 /410) 9-00 S PERMIT NO. (206)431-3670 Pro'ect: kk Pf (-1,.• T pe--6 nspection: `N, A ro: 6,5 --* S AAA tt..-. Date c ,Special instructions: Date vvr? : b, 4619 a.m. . Pm. Reques er: /1/1frf— i *Ait7 r 4 - Phone: 2/Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: lnspe Atat, Ac $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reingiection. Receipt No: Date: INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECOkJ Retain a'copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 m cp-o382, PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 ect �l�Wl K. �Gtl tVl.�1 t �1�1 Type of I ee .n: r Cr' ..- ~ /S V1C_- 546, AfJdr�s mail Date called: O Special instructions: -ft (e„ 0 �001 Date wanted: a. m. ( � ] GO .m. �stec Reg Phr a b —a 41 -11;99 • Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspecto Date: El $47.00 REINSPECTIO VEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECOR`u Retain a copy with permit CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 Mac(- 0033 PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 Projec vviA. Type of Inspection: ` A ress: Date called: , QQ O Special instructions: ` b0 J\_ \I \GEC \.( rt\Y 0■'(\.0 :k.. Date wanted: ` --1" \_�ooOCa.m� p.m. Requester: ff Pho e. ` ..sCI O' \s -1 4j'Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: idoz-,/v.c. „e4e -c��,4 .ff /17■9f i0 gawe f/e,4,72A_ro, (v S /DDS � • tt,(/ C/y�jZ OA. TO rx6e-e -Q72E ID $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No: Date: ff aEFaJ1.,%i1:.:4:4:0,i ' l:' ^.'ti';r.: City of Tukwila Steven M. Mullet, Mayor Fire Department Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM Proj ect Name ..55CANC t -Cr ALL Permit No. 1' X59_ 3 Address 63 3 v* ca c. C m, LL, Suite # Retain current inspection-schedule-.- Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: 1-NA Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: 51 Ps5 ( Authorized Signature Date FINALAPP.FRM Rev. 2/19/98 T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: 206.575.4404 • Fax: 206.575.4439 APR. 15. 1999 14 VvaShlnITI Envelope Summary PARTNERS INC. .Mate 1�u111 deldential 1994 WaSnlnypn S1aNNO.1 *IN,npal Foamy Geao Compliance Forma ner ode Climate Zone 1 - NO.4130 P.3 /5 14 r ENV -SUM A N. 1994 P: eject Info Pro act AddreSS sOUT l 1 Coa µALL Cate 2,-/4 Pm_ For Building Department Use - -_ So JTL1 C.N ctit, T k (1-4f4AY iukWlt,_A Appuwnt Name: l ' 11 W l i NA RGN l-�ECM Applicant Address: ef 19„ dLI V WAY t$ 50o sePrn. _, Applicant Phone: 2.o G) 62.3M-3341- - Project Description ❑ New Building ❑ Addition Alteration Change of Use Compliance option Prescriptive U Component Performance (See Oeclalon Flowohar (aver) for qualifications) ENVSTD ❑ Systems Analysis 5 ap ce Heat Type Q Electric resistance El All other (see over far definitions) Glazing Area Calculation Nolo: Below grade walla may be Included In the Gross Fl required Io Area If trey an lnsulaleb to the level required Ior opaque walla. Total Glazing Area (rough opening) (vertical 8 overhd) dMNded by Grass Exterior Wall Area times 100 equals % Glazing (6 / S i 1 - 6 / 2.S6 X 1 OQ = 41 / ' C Concrete/Masonry Option . 0 Cheek hero if using Ihls option and if project meets ell reaulremanla far the Conoreluldaeonry Option. See Decision Flowchart (over) for qualifications. Enter requirement. for each qualifying *sssmbly In the table beiow. envelope Requirements (enter values as applicable) Fully haarad/o+voled Space CO OE Minimum Insuledon R•velues Rears Over Attic — i= !MI /A All Other Roofs —91111.11 Opaque Walls r ..l Below Grade Wales ••.- Floors Over Unconditioned Space •- M IMIIMIll Slabs -on -Grade ti. Radiant Floors .. -- .. limi Maximum U- factors Opaque Doors — N A Vertical Glazing 0 4' CC Q • q0 Overhead Glazing 1 s 45 0 • q-0 Maximum SHGC (or SC) VertIcaVOvertleed Glum fl 1, 0 0 1,00 Serr!•ireated specs' Roofs Over Semi - Heeled Spaces' 'Refer to Section 1310 for qualifications and requirements Notes: Minimum lnsuladon R- values • • que ConcretelMasonry Wee Requirements lion an Interior • maximum U•factar Is 0.10 -ft on exterior or integral - maximum U- factor is .25 If pro' •usifles for Concretr/Masonry Option, II - IIS 0 Btu/RwF below (other/Me must eat Opaque Wa equfrements). Use description- • • values fram Table • • in the Code. Description Wall J vi. AIA .�_ _in... .. limi Merimurn SHGC for SC) APR. 15'199 900t0:a hill MI,Tk•'' PI RIZERc INldntIa Envelope Summary (back) 1014 W unington Sate Nonresidential Energy Cods Comp Iona Fore Decision Ftowthart for Prescriptive Option Ere C.de Ca N0.t 648� P.4/5 urr Climate Zone 1 ENV -SUM April, 1904 Use this flowchart to determine If project qualifies for the optional Prescriptive Option. If riot, either the Component Performance or Systems Analysis Options must be yeas, 130 Specs knot Types For the purpose of detarmIruna lWang erneloos requirement: me roirowrng tuna =podia contpdw all 'plea neaeng eypeei 0eler:Ai oilier epees hems dreams In0luding gar. WW1*, a1, arta omoons epees psoong systems and Ihow systems bated In ale etoepdon Id electric; reetsrancs. (Oenbnued st node ,,' '.. -, All \, ''Masonry '., walls R.11 ' `- -14/efl Cattalo Oli ?'' 'J(uWaddn? 'no s(Ue1aw)i ' Y•s 440%x\ 1'' 4lo:utg2'' 1111 ref T'' AU Insula r:A:rlatilled? Opaque Walla R ..11 Beige, grads well lot/ R.10 Below 9rad4wlls (amr) R -11 Roofs over siaci R 40 AJI Other roofs R -21 Flows over uncondsp. R -19 Slabi;011.0r10e R•10 Radiant floors R -10 Opaque doors 1..00 Olaang Correia Mar Glaidng Vern 014 Ares % 1.1 U SP GC 00.15% 0.90 145 1.00 16-2056 0,75 140 1.00 20- 30710.60 1.30 0.65 30.4016 0.50 1.25 0.45 ..e• % 1y 'Yes Eleetna Aealsancs: Spam' hinting spews amts1 usa elsc61C re.rstama.areersa as the pnmaer 1104Umg ere am hleluaine baseboard, reain ono scrod w chin rrlfehl the halal el.cV'a nueanoe heel uosoityeeoeeds 10 me cool. taros. e«MIliened floor area. ¥0.p511 11511 pumps and terminal medals mistanoe nesting in vanable air alume o4nleuren systems 6RINLItsnaa Neer 7•s AU lrsuiaddn Installed? Opaque Wills R.11 Mawnry wells (inn U-0.12 Masonry walla (mar) U•0.2.5 Below grade *sae estt) R -10 ° slaw grido wells (O RO R.11 Rood awe sums R40 AU runty roofs R.21 Floors over uneand.ep. R.11 Slobo -on -Ores. R.10 Radrnt floors R.10 OpagUe doers 1.14,60 Gls:In9 Cnteni Mer Grazing Vert 6-f Ara % U U 51a0C 00.15% 0.90 1.46 1.00 15.20% 0,75 1,40 1.03 :0.90% 0,00 1.30 0.65 30.0% a.3o 1.25 0,46 , Masonry " /v All all Creams 01i41--<. walla R.19; (below)/ 00 \esulsOarYV 114 YY41 42014 3tr ros AU InsulabOn Installed/ ODaque Wale R -10 Masonry sails (Int) 1.1.0.10 Masonry l444s (arbor) U.0.25 6e1ow grade walls (salt) R•10 blew grads wells (/the) R -19 Rods over attJd R.36 AJI Wu roars R40 Roars over uneond. R•30 Maas-on-grads R.10 Radiant loves R -10 Counie dears U.0.60 Gaging cntana Men Giszmg Vert 011 Am % U U 5HG0 00.2016 0,40 0.10 1,00 1›.} awno2� All Insuleaar Indttllea7 Opaque Weis R•19 Below grade wads (en) R•I0 Below araod Monk (et) R.19 Rags Over attics R.38 All aster roofs R40 Floors over wound R.30 Cabs-WINO R.10 RedJalltfloats R•1O 0pequedoors U4.60 Glaring Grains Metz Gluing Vert 011 Area % U U 51400 00 -2016 0.40 0,60 1.00 ete/Maso • . film* Wail Heat Capacit (HC _,mad Assembly f7sse -��IIIIIIIIIIIIIII a N~ 1111.1..." MOM Mill qill&-bl25".11E1111 Tattle Illibb-• Ares weighted HC. divide total of (HC x area) by Total Area if rte sma weighted heat capacity (HC) of the total arm grads wall is a minimum of 9.0, the Concrete Masonry Option may be used. **Pot framed walla, assume HC =1.0 unless Cilculatlana are provided: for W otherwa(Is, use &Won 2009, y�Ny keting, an4 vveatnarsotpptng APR. 15.19S9 10:04AM MITI PARTNERS INC 1994 Washingto tate Nonresidential Energy Code 6, 1pliit104.64gormF.5/5 Building Permit Plans Checklist ENV -CHK 117614 m.nmawn Stns snowy coos Carnpkanaat Forme A , tRM Prtr)+ct Addrasa S©UTNCat MALL s . CENi E12- P Y-W Y -cu Dude The relict/ling Information is necessary to Check a building permit appiicatlon for compliance with the alluding envelope requirements in the Wathingtan State Nonresidenttal Enerey Code, ApplIcabiliry cit ie one) Code Section Location on Plans Building Ceparrnent Notes GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Sections 1301 -1314 imming 1301 Scope Unconditioned spaces identified on ratans If allowed 1J . 1302 Seeee treat - • NM EMEIMMININ EleetnC resiwnce l ginErfrie'1111111111111111 Indicate an ratans that electric resistance heat Is not allowed 111=1111111111111111111111111111111111 IMICEIrtee, 1310.2 Sam - heateo spaces Semt.neated spaces identtfieo on exams If allowed 1101•1 1311 Insulation mum= Ins I. installation Indicate aensitles and clearances "' 13112 1311.3 Roo( rceiiing /flout. Wall Insulation 1311.5 Slatrort -grace Floor Rgclant floor 1312,1 U- lathers 1312.2 1313 1313.2 1314.1 13142 1314,3 SHGC & SC Moisture contra, Vapor retarders Roof /ceiling v0p.ret. Wail vapor retarder Floor va • •r retarder Crawl soaps vac, rat. Arr teaks • e Slag, envef, sealing GIa2N • /door sealin Assemo, as duets Indlcate Revalue on roof sections for attics and other tees; Indicate clearances for attic insulation; indicate tafites if aye vents installed; indicate face staolin• of faced baits Indicate R•val4e on wail swoons; Indacste face stapling of raced belts; Indicate above grade exterior Insulation ,s protected; indicate loose -ml core insulation for masonry walls as races/; Indicate heat capacity of masenty walita If mason oration is used or if credit taken In ENVSTD; Indicate Revalue en floor sections: Indicate suestaritiai contact with surface; Indicate supports not more than 24' o.o,; Indicate that insulation Goes not block airflow lhrouoh foundetIan vents A6•o Indicate Revalue an wall section or oundatldn detail; Indicate slab Insulation extends clown vertically 244 from top: Indicate above •rade exterior Insulation Is protected Inalcate Revalue on wall $ectten or foundation detail; Inalcate stao insulation extends down vertically 36' from the top; Indicate above grade exterior insulation 19 protected; Indicate insulation also under entire slab where read. by Oft iel Provtae calculation of glazing area (including nrxn vertical vertical and ovemaadt es Percent of •loss will arts Indicate grazing and door U- /actors on glazing and door scneduie (provide area •weighted calculations as necessary); Indicate if values are NFRC or default, If values are default then specify frame type, glazing layers. gapwtcth, low-e coalln•s. as riilin•s Inoleate glazing solar heat gain eoefflatent Or shading coefficient on glgtng schedule (provide area- weighted caIculaaons as necessary) Indicate vapor retarders on warm Site Indicate vapor retarder an root section; Indicate vac, retard, with sealed seams for flan •wood *true. Indicate vapor retarder on wail section Indleste vapor retarder on rigor section Indicate six mil stack pal ethylene ovenaaoed 12" on •round Inalcate sealing, caution°, gap Indicate weatnerstnecin• Indicate •aln•, kn a OMPON NT PERFORMANCE Sections 13 a -23 or 1330 -34 no is circ amp r any question, prove Envelope Sum, Form CompleteG ano attached. Provide component performance worksheet if necessary Proviae SNVSTO screen t out•ut if neon= • e axp anatlCn: AT�u+�D TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS for the SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION located at FILE COPY Tukwila, Wash' gto kand that the Plan Chock cppr c•: c.:3 cro cu'ti;.ct to errors and omissions and cpp vcl of p'�7.3 dooc not authodze the violation of any adc7ted codo or ordkiums, Receipt of contractor's copy of = prov i . plane aohnowledped By 14 April, 1949 Date Permit No. FOR PERMIT REVIEW MITHUN • P A R T N E R S MPI PROJECT NO. 98294.00 CITY OF TUKWILA APPROVED SEP 2 1 1999 AS NU 16/ ISU1LO?NG DIVT8i6ts1 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA APR 1 y 1999 PERMIT CENTER hnetV-0C183 ■ SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1 1 1 1 1. 1.. 1.. 1_ D. Frames shall be supplied with natural finish. 1.3 Execution L. 1. 1... SECTION 02872 - TREE GRATES 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 1. Shop drawings showing layout, details of construction, patterns or designs, dimensions, profiles, anchors, and accessories.. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturer: Ironsmith Architectural Products, Inc., P.O. Box 1141, Palm Desert, CA 92261; 800/338-4766. B. Materials: Tree grate and frame assembly, Starburst model #M7208 -1; 72" x 72 ". Natural finish. C. Tree grate material shall be cast aluminum per ASTM B26, latest revision. Alit ree grate castings hall be manufactured true to pattern an component parts, and shall fit together in satisfactory manner, planar, and in full alignment to component parts and surrounding materials. Castings shall be of uniform pattern and quality, free from blowholes, hard spots, shrinkage, distortion, or other defects. Clean castings by sandblasting. Grates shall be Americans with Disabilities Act compliant regarding pattern, design, and slip resistance. 1 A. Examination: coordinate with the work of other Sections for the proper installation of frame relative to finish construction and for uniform appearance. B. Install frames and grates where indicated on Plans, flush and leveled with surrounding finish floor surfaces. Use spreaders or stakes to keep frames from being distorted by concrete pressure. Clean concrete and debris from frame prior to grate installation. Provide wood or foam blocks in new concrete for projection of pilfer -proof bolts. C. Grind grate pads on bottom of grate sections as necessary for level. Maintain flush, aligned, and leveled at all times. Adjust tree opening diameter as necessary to accomodate trees and as directed by Owner's landscape and planting consultant, utilizing manufacturer's pre- determined opening diameters. D. Remove or protect tree grates if surrounding concrete or floor around tree well perimeter is chemically treated or acid washed. E. Position tree grates to meet in the center of tree well and have uniform spacing around outside edges of castings. Drill through counter -bored holes in the grates and install pilfer -proof bolts per manufacturer's instructions. F. Clean installed assembly and provide protection as necessary. END OF SECTION 02872 TREE GRATES 02872 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit design mixes and the following for each concrete mix: 1. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication, bending, and placement. 2. Material certificates signed by product manufacturers certifying that product complies with requirements. B. Quality Assurance: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," and ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 1. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.2 Products A. Steel Reinforcement: As follows: 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. 2. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, flat sheets. B. Concrete Materials: As follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source. 3. Water: ASTM C 94. 4. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 5. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 6. High- Range, Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 7. Water - Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. 8. Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 9. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1 -1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. C. Related Materials: As follows: 1. Flexible Joints at planters: Manville Expand -O -Flash 2. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, not less than 7.8 mils (0.18 mm) thick; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. 3. Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt - saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self - expanding cork. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 4. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non - redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 5. Epoxy - Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two- component epoxy resin, of type, class, and grade to suit requirements. D. Curing Materials: As follows: 1. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 2. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. (305 g /sq. m) dry. 3. Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. 4. Clear, Solvent- Borne, Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 5. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 6. Clear, Solvent - Borne, Membrane - Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 7. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane - Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. E. Concrete Mixes: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). 3. Air Content: 4.0 percent. 4. See structural drawings for specific mix requirements. F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1 lb /cu. yd. (0.60 kg /cu. m). G. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. H. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. I. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. 1.3 Execution A. Design, construct, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 C. Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has ache •.ed 28 -day design compressive strength. D. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M), ACI 301, anti recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. E. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor- retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643. F. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. G. Joints: Locate and install construction, isolation, and contraction joints. H. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Concrete Placement: Deposit concrete continuously and avoid segregation. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm), avoiding cold joints. J. 1. Consolidate concrete with.mechanical vibrating equipment. 2. Screed and initial -float concrete floors and slabs using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather concrete placement. 4. Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R when hot - weather conditions exist. Finish formed surfaces as follows: 1. Apply rough- formed finish, defined in ACI 301, to concrete surfaces indicated or not exposed to public view. 2. Apply smooth- formed finish, defined in ACI 301, to concrete surfaces indicated and exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting. a. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth- formed finish. 3. Apply smooth- rubbed finish to smooth- formed finished concrete surfaces indicated or exposed to public view. K. Finishing Floors and Slabs: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. 1. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish, defined in ACI 301, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. 2. Float Finish: Apply float finish, defined in ACI 301, to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to surfaces to be covered with fluid - applied or sheet waterproofing, built -up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 3. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film- finish coating system. a. After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power- driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. b. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10 -foot- (3.05 -m -) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed the following: 1) 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). 3) 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 4. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin -set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 5. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete, brooming with fiber - bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route, to platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. L. Concrete Protection and Curing: Protect concrete from excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold- weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot - weather protection during curing. 1. Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause excessive moisture loss. 2. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. 3. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by moisture curing, moisture - retaining -cover curing, or curing compound. 4. Cure and seal floors and slabs with a curing and sealing compound according to manufacturer's written instructions. M. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. N. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 1. SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 03450 - PLANT - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 1.1 General A. Structural Performance: Provide precast architectural concrete units and connections capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated: concrete veneer accent band units. B. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit design mixes and the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of precast architectural concrete units. Indicate member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, limits of each finish, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. 2. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of precast architectural concrete units, one set of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm). C. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast architectural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. D. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and the design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design I- landbook -- Precast and Prestressed Concrete." E. Quality- Control Standard: Comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel "; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code — Reinforcing Steel." G. Store units at Project site to prevent cracking, distorting, warping, staining, or other physical damage, and so markings are visible. 1. Lift and support units only at designated lifting and supporting points as shown on Shop Drawings. 1.2 Products A. Reinforcing Materials: As follows: 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. 2. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. 3. Deformed -Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. B. Concrete Materials: As follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, white, of same type, brand, and source. 2. Normal - Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33 3. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C -260. PLANT - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 C. Concrete Mixes: Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required and as follows: 1. Normal - Weight Concrete; Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal - weight concrete with the following properties: a. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). b. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. c. Water Absorption: 12 to 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117. d. Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117. D. Fabrication: 1. Cast -in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in precast architectural concrete units to receive windows, cramps, dowels, reglets, waterstops, flashings, and other similar work as indicated. 2. Reinforce precast architectural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. 3. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. 4. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. 5. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built -in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117. 6. Identify pickup points of precast architectural concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast architectural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure. 7. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low- pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. 8. Discard precast architectural concrete units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained, or otherwise defective unless repairs are approved by Architect. 9. Fabricate precast architectural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast -in items. E. Finishes: Finish exposed -face surfaces of precast architectural concrete units to match approved design reference sample and as follows: 1. PCI and APA's "Architectural Precast Concrete- -Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate numbers indicated. 2. Smooth- Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture. 3. Finish exposed surfaces of precast architectural concrete units. PLANT - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03450 - 2 li i 1 r i r SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1.3 Execution A. Install precast architectural concrete. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected. 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. B. Install precast architectural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I. C. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of precast architectural concrete units to match color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding precast architectural concrete if permitted by Architect. D. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. END OF SECTION 03450 PLANT - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 03490 - GLASS - FIBER- REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Structural Performance: Provide GFRC shapes capable of withstanding gravity, wind, seismic, and erection design loads as well as the effects of thermal- and moisture - induced volume changes, according to load factors and loading combinations. 1. Design framing systems to withstand design loads with lateral deflections no greater than 1/360 of the wall height. B. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit GFRC design mixes, welding certificates, manufacturer qualification data, and the following: 1. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication and installation of GFRC panels. Indicate panel elevations, sections, and dimensions; thickness of facing, GFRC backing, and bonding pads; finishes; joint and connection details; lifting and erection details; cold - formed metal framing layout and details; location and details of connection hardware attached to structure; size, location, and details of flex, gravity, and seismic anchors; other items sprayed into panels; and description of loose, cast -in, and field hardware. 2. Samples of GFRC showing the full range of colors and textures expected, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). C. Quality Assurance: Comply with PCI MNL 130, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Products," and as follows: 1. Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing GFRC shapes and that assumes responsibility for engineering GFRC shapes; provides comprehensive engineering analysis prepared, signed, and sealed by a professional engineer legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located; and participates in PCI's Plant Certification Program and is designated a PCI- Certified Plant for Group G, Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete. 3. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. 1.2 Products A. Concrete Materials: Complying with PCI MNL 130 and as follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III, white to achieve sample finish color. 2. Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N. 3. Glass Fibers: Alkali resistant, with a minimum zirconia content of 16 percent, 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) long, specifically produced for use in GFRC. 4. Sand: Washed and dried silica, successfully used in GFRC production, complying with composition requirements of ASTM C 144. 5. Aggregate: ASTM C 33. 6. Water: Potable. 7. Curing Admixture: Acrylic thermoplastic copolymer dispersion. 8. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE 03490 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 9. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494. B. Anchors and Subsystems: As follows: 1. Carbon -Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Carbon -Steel Rods: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018, cold drawn. 3. Carbon -Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M. 4. Bolts: ASTM A 307 or ASTM A 325 (ASTM F 568M or ASTM A 325M). 5. Finish: Zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M and ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable. 6. Finish: Shop primed with lead- and chromate -free, rust - inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P -664 or SSPC -Paint 25. C. Frame Materials: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural -steel sheet, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, cold formed into manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel studs with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). D. GFRC Mixes: Proportion backing mix of portland cement, glass fibers, sand, and selected admixtures. Provide nominal glass -fiber content of not less than 5 percent. 1. Proportion face mix of portland cement, fine and coarse aggregates, and selected admixtures, with an air content of 3 to 10 percent; ASTM C 231. E. Panel Frame: Fabricate panel framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Fasten cold- formed metal framing members by welding. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures. 2. Fasten structural -steel framing members by welding. Comply with AWS D1.1 requirements and procedures for welding. 3. Weld flex, gravity, and seismic anchors to panel framing. 4. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. 5. Repair Painting: Touch up accessible damaged galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A 780 and painted surfaces using rust - inhibitive prime -paint material compatible with shop coat. F. GFRC Fabrication: Proportion, mix, spray, consolidate, and cure GFRC according to PCI MNL 130 procedures. 1. Spray mist coat of matrix without glass fibers over molds to a thickness not exceeding 1/8 inch (3 min). 2. Spray face mix in thickness indicated on Shop Drawings. 3. Proceed with spraying up backing mix skin before face mix has set, using procedures that produce a uniform thickness and even distribution of glass fibers and matrix. 4. Attach frame to GFRC before initial set of GFRC backing, maintaining a minimum clearance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) from GFRC backing, and without anchors protruding into GFRC backing. 5. Build up homogeneous GFRC bonding pads over anchor legs, maintaining a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch (13 mm) over top of anchor foot, before initial set of GFRC backing. GLASS- FIBER - REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE 03490 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 6. Inserts and Embedments: Build up homogeneous GFRC bosses or bonding pads over inserts and embedments to provide sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. G. Manufacturing Tolerances: Manufacture GFRC units so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 130 for dimension, position, and frame tolerances. H. Finish exposed -face surfaces of GFRC units as follows to match Architect's design reference sample. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, or other obvious defects. 1. Color and Finish: Match existing columns at Food Court Entrance. I. Quality- Control Testing: Establish and maintain a quality- control program for manufacturing GFRC units according to PCI MNL 130. 1. Test and inspect GFRC production. Include material acceptance testing, preproduction testing, aggregate production testing, wet production testing, and production testing after curing. 1.3 Execution A. Erection: Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting GFRC units to supporting members and backup materials. 1. Lift GFRC units at lifting points established by manufacturer and install without damaging units. 2. Install GFRC units level, plumb, square, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are completed. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width. Remove projecting hoisting devices. 3. Anchor GFRC units in position by bolting or welding, or both, as indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring is completed. 4. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Protect GFRC units from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required. 5. At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts. 6. Erect GFRC units to comply with PCI MNL 130 noncumulative tolerances. END OF SECTION 03490 GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE 03490 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 03532 - CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 1.1 General A. Submittals: Submit Product Data and material test reports. B. Cast topping mockups approximately 100 sq. ft. in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. C. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate moisture content, humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting topping performance. Place topping only when ambient temperature and temperature of base slabs are between 50 and 86 deg F. 1.2 Products A. Mineral- Aggregate Toppings: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. A -H Emery A -1 Premix; Anti-Hydro International, Inc. 2. Emery Tuff Top; Dayton Superior Corporation. 3. Emerytop 400; L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 4. Met -Top E; Metalcrete Industries. 5. Emeri -Crete Topping; Sternson Group. B. Iron - Aggregate Toppings: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. A -H Irontop; Anti-Hydro International, Inc. 2. Iron Topping RM; Burke Group, LLC (The). 3. Conplate Floor Topping; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Super Euco -Top; Euclid Chemical Co. 5. Mastertop 300 Anvil -Top; Master Builders, Inc. 6. Metalcrete; Metalcrete Industries. 7. Ferrotop; Sternson Group. C. Clear, Solvent- Borne, Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 25 percent solids content, minimum. D. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two - component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 percent ASTM D 2240. E. Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt- saturated cellulosic fiber. F. Acrylic- Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non - redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. G. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type V, two- component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements. H. Topping: Mix topping materials and water in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions. CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 -1 5 yrikCSM1'd2n;yr.>:V SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1.3 Execution A. Preparation of Existing Concrete: Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to topping manufacturer's written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs. B. Install joint -filler strips where topping abuts vertical surfaces. C. Install topping according to manufacturer's written instructions. Start application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. D. Existing Concrete: Apply epoxy - bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturer's written instructions, and scrub into dry base slabs. Place topping while adhesive is still tacky. E. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open - textured surface plane free of humps or hollows. F. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power- driven floats as soon as topping can support equipment and operator. Float and restraighten surface. Apply hard trowel finish, leaving surface smooth and uniform. G. Begin curing immediately after finishing topping. Apply curing compound uniformly in two coats in continuous operations by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. H. Install epoxy joint filler full depth of contraction joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. I. Repair and patch defective topping areas, including areas that have not bonded to concrete substrate. END OF SECTION 03532 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 -. 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. Shop Drawings: For masonry reinforcing bars; comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. 2. Samples showing the full range of colors and textures available for exposed masonry units and colored mortars. 3. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, for each type of masonry unit required; mortar complying with property requirements, and grout complying with compressive strength requirement. 4. Material Certificates: For each type of masonry unit required. B. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform the following preconstruction testing: 1. Clay Masonry Units: For each clay masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 67. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C 140. 3. Mortar: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270. 4. Grout: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019. C. Fire- Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire - resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Sample Panels: Build sample panels, to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects, for each type of exposed unit masonry assembly in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness. E. Cold- Weather Requirements: Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold- weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602. F. Hot - Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km /h), do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches (1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. 1.2 Products A. Color and Texture: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1, Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa) 2150 psi (14.8 MPa) 2800 psi (19.3 MPa) 3050 psi (21.0 MPa) . 2. Weight Classification: Medium weight . 3. Provide Type I, moisture - controlled units. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 4. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. C. Brick, General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. 2. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. D. Face Brick: ASTM C 216 Grade SW , Type FBX , and as follows: 1. Mutual Materials: #43710 Smooth Finish Color "Copper" (confirm match to existing masonry on site). 2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) . 3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g /30 sq. in. (20 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 5. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions: Match existing brick. E. Mortar and Grout Materials: As follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold - weather construction. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207 , Type S. 3. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329 . 4. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 . 5. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement or cement -lime formulation as required to produce the color indicated. • 6. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 -mm) sieve. a. Colored- Mortar Aggregates: Natural - colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. 7. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 8. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 9. Water: Potable. F. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60 (Grade 400). G. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951 ; mill galvanized, carbon -steel wire for interior walls and hot -dip galvanized, carbon -steel wire for exterior walls. H. Ties and Anchors, General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent paragraphs, made from materials that comply with this paragraph, unless otherwise indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION J• MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. Galvanized Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B -2 coating for exterior walls and Class 1 coating for interior walls. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold - rolled, carbon -steel sheet hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, at exterior walls; and ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), commercial - quality, steel sheet zinc coated by hot - dip process on continuous lines before fabrication at interior walls. Adjustable Masonry- Veneer Anchors: Provide two -piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to wall, for attachment over sheathing to metal studs, and that are capable of withstanding a 100 -1bf (445 - N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). 1. Dur.O Wal D/A 213S system with pencil rod attachment provisions in pintle section; 11 ga. pintle; 12 ga. Plate; stainless steel proprietary screws - two per plate. 2. Seismic Masonry- Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a rib - stiffened, sheet metal anchor section with screw holes top and bottom; with raised rib - stiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot for a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint. Embedded Flashing Materials: As follows: 1. Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and below: a. Copper - Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing consisting of 5- oz. /sq. ft. (1.5- kg /sq. m) sheet copper bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass -fiber cloth. K. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories: As follows: 1. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene urethane or PVC . 2. Bond - Breaker Strips: Asphalt - saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 3. Round Plastic Weep /Vent Tubing: Medium - density polyethylene, 3/8 -inch (9 -mm) OD by 4 inches (100 mm) long. 4. Cavity Drainage Material: Washed peagravel. L. Masonry Cleaners: As follows: 1. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard - strength cleaner designed for removing mortar /grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. M. Mortar and Grout Mixes: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 1. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 , Proportion Specification. 2. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 , Property Specification. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 a. Extended -Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option. b. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. c. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type M. d. For exterior, above - grade, load - bearing and non - load - bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load - bearing walls; for interior non - load - bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 3. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight: a. For portland cement -lime mortar, not more than 10 percent. b. For masonry cement or mortar cement mortar, not more than 5 percent. 4. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 . a. Use grout of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. b. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143. N. Clear Water Repellent: Hydrozo, Fabrishield, or equal as recommended by brick manufacturer. 1.3 Execution A. Cut masonry units with motor - driven saws. Allow units cut with water - cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g /30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying. D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602 and the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. E. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less- than - half -size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 4 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 F. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern to match existing masonry; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch (100 -mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. G. Built -in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in items. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. I. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: J• 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. Lay solid brick -size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. K. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Match existing masonry. L. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. 1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. M. Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. N. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. O. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with seismic masonry- veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten each anchor section through sheathing to wall framing with two metal fasteners of type indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 5 SOUTFICENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter. P. Install precast concrete accent veneer unit furnished under the work of other sections in the masonry veneer system, mortared in place with joints per brick masonry.. Q. Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. Extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. 2. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge. 3. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal flashing termination. R. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity at spacing indicated. 1. Use round plastic tubing to form weep holes and vents . 2. Space weep holes 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 3. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. S. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. T. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of Section 2104.5 of the Uniform Building Code. U. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 2104.6 of the Uniform Building Code for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. V. Field Quality Control: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner . UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 6 ... r. .w. +..: zsxMar�ss.:.. zr: xMxv^ t;: .¢!rc�:!:a,er:.sem:atxr = ^�.0 ,.. >,v SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1 1. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in these subparagraphs will be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. ^ 2. Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780 . 3. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019 . 4. Brick Tests: For each type and grade of brick indicated, units will be tested according to I ASTM C 67. 5. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested according to ASTM C 140. W. Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as follows: 1. By dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as work progresses. 2. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: a. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one -half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. b. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. c. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. d. Clean brick by the bucket - and -brush hand - cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20, using job -mixed detergent solution. e. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. f. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8 -2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. X. Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil - contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. 2. Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. Y. Sealing: Apply clear water repellent coating with low pressure spray equipment per manufacturer's instructions. Protect surrounding work. END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 7 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 04851- DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Structural Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures indicated on Drawings. 2. Equipment Loads: Allow for loads due to window cleaning and maintenance equipment. B. Seismic Performance: Provide dimension stone cladding system capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to Chapter 16 of the Uniform Building Code. 1. Seismic Design Criteria: See structural drawings. C. Safety Factors for Stone: Design dimension stone cladding system to withstand loads indicated without exceeding allowable working stress of stone determined by dividing stone's average ultimate strength, as established by testing, by the following safety factors: 1. Safety Factors for Granite: 3 for uniform loads and 4 for concentrated loads. 2. Safety Factors for Oolitic Limestone: According to ILI's "Technote on Safety Factors." 3. Safety Factors for Dolomitic Limestone, Marble, and Slate: 5 for uniform loads and 10 for concentrated loads. 4. Safety Factors for Quartz -Based Stone: 8 for uniform loads and 10 for concentrated loads. D. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: For each variety of stone stone accessory, sealants, water repellant, and other manufactured products indicated. Provid manufacturer's data indicating campatibility of stone, sealants and water repellent. 2. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation of dimension stone cladding system, including dimensions and profiles of stone units. a. Show locations and details of anchors and backup structure. b. For installed dimension stone cladding systems indicated to comply with certain design loads and deflection limits, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified structural engineer responsible for their preparation. 3. Stone Samples: Sets for each color, grade, finish, and variety of stone required; not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square. E. Preconstruction Stone Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Furnish test specimens randomly seleL : from blocks representative of actual materials proposed for incorporation into the W�, DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. One set of test specimens will be required for each stone variety, of number and size indicated in referenced standards. 3. Stone will be tested for compliance with physical property requirements according to referenced ASTM standards. 4. Flexural Strength Tests: ASTM C 880, performed on specimens representative of minimum thickness and finish of installed stone. One set will be tested in both wet and dry conditions. 5. Anchorage Tests: ASTM C 1354, performed on specimens representative of minimum thickness and finish of installed stone. One set will be tested for each combination of stone variety, finish, and anchor type. F. Mockups: Before installing dimension stone cladding systems, build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Mockup shall contain radius cut stone and may be part of permanent installation. 2. Build mockups of typical exterior wall with dimension stone cladding, approximately 72 inches (1800 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high. 1.2 Products A. Marble: Provide marble complying with ASTM C 503 and as follows: 1. Varieties and Sources: As follows: a. "Largo" marble, by Innovative Marble at 1- 800 - 627 -8663. 24 "x24" slabs, 1'.4 inches thick. 2. Finish: Polished B. Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 316, temper as required to support loads imposed without exceeding allowable design stresses. C. Fabricate anchors, including shelf angles, from hot -dip galvanized steel, ASTM A 36 /A 36M for materials and ASTM A 123/A 123M for galvanizing. D. Backup Structure: Fabricate components not in contact with stone from hot - rolled steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or from steel sheet not less than 0.1046 inch (2.7 mm) thick complying with ASTM A 570/A 570M. Fabricate components in contact with stone from same material specified for anchors. E. Setting Shuns: Strips of resilient plastic or vulcanized neoprene, 50 to 70 Shore A durometer, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses and depths of stone supports without intruding into required depths of joint sealants or causing third -side adhesion between sealant and setting shims. F. Concealed Sheet Metal Flashing: Fabricate from stainless steel complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" in thicknesses indicated, but not less than 0.0156 inch (0.4 nun) thick. G. Weep and Vent Tubes: Medium- density polyethylene tubing, 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) OD and of length required to extend from exterior face of stone to cavity behind. DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851- 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 H. Sealant Products: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants that are compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials and that comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to those indicated below: a. Low - modulus, neutral- curing silicone sealant. Dark grey color to match stone. Provide manufacturer's full range of standard colors for review. 2. Sealant for Filling Kerfs: As follows: a. Single- component, nonsag, urethane sealant for Use T. Stone Fabrication: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. For marble, comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimensional Stone -- Design Manual IV." 2. Control depth of stone and back check to maintain minimum clearances indicated between backs of stone units and surfaces or projections of structural members, fireproofing (if any), backup walls, and other work behind stone. 3. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut stone to produce joints of uniform width and in locations indicated. 5. Contiguous Work: Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as required to accommodate contiguous work. J. Fabrication of Backup Structure: Fabricate and assemble cold- formed metal framing to comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Cold- Formed Metal Framing." K. Shop - painted Steel Finishes: Comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting backup structure. 1. Surface Preparation: After completing fabrication of steel items, prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC -SP 6 /NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Apply 2 -coat high - performance coating system consisting of organic zinc -rich primer, complying with SSPC -Paint 20, at 2.5 -mil (0.065 -mm) dry film thickness and topcoat of high- build, 2- component, epoxy - polyamide, high - performance coating at 6 -mil (0.15 - mm) dry film thickness. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. High- Performance Coating Systems: 1) Carboline 621 and 190 HB; Carboline Company. 2) Aquapon Zinc -Rich Primer 97 -670 and High -Build Polyamide -Epoxy 97- 131; PPG Industries, Inc. 3) Tneme -Zinc 90 -97 and Series 69 Hi -Build Epoxoline II; Tnemec Company, Inc. L. Clear impregnating sealer: Stone care International, Inc.; specific product as recommended by stone manufacturer. Confirm compatibility with sealants. DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1.3 Execution A. Execute dimension stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at Project site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. B. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure dimension stone cladding in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships. C. Provide expansion, control, and pressure - relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Sealing expansion and other joints is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 2. Keep expansion joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. D. Install concealed flashing at continuous shelf angles, lintels, ledges, and similar obstructions to downward flow of water to divert water to building exterior. E. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities. 1. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate, including base of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and flashing. Locate weep holes and vents at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm) and for those serving as vents only, at intervals not exceeding 60 inches (1500 mm) horizontally and 20 feet (6 m) vertically. F. Setting Mechanically Anchored Dimension Stone Cladding: Attach anchors securely to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1242. 1. Attach framing for stone support system to structural frame of building by welding or bolting. a. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. b. For shop - painted surfaces, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately after erection. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. 2. Fill anchor holes with sealant. Where dowel holes occur at pressure - relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels. 3. Set stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of stone a distance at least equal to width of joint. G. Joint Sealant Installation: Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Water Repellant: Apply two coats per manufacturer's recommendations prior to or during stone application. DIMENSION STONE CLADDING 04851- 4 1,. SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 Clean dimension stone cladding no fewer than six days after completion of pointing and sealing, using clean water and stiff - bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid -type cleaning agents, cleaning agents containing caustic compounds or abrasives, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. END OF SECTION 04851 DIMENSION STONE CLADDING SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. C. Submittals: In addition to Product Data and mill test reports on structural steel and bolts, submit Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components, including connections, splices, holes, welds, and bolts. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify high- strength bolted slip - critical, direct - tension, or tensioned shear /bearing connections. D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings — Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 2. ASTM A 6 (ASTM A 6M) "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." 3. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." 1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. F. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 1.2 Products A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), carbon steel. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 572 (ASTM A 572M), Grade 50, high - strength, low -alloy columbium- vanadium steel. C. Cold- Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. D. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), unheaded rods. E. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), headed bolts, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon -steel nuts. F. Nonhigh - Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); carbon - steel, hex -head bolts; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers, uncoated. G. High - Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers, uncoated. H. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust - inhibiting primer. I. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage - Resistant Grout: Premixed, ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application. J. Fabrication: Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. 1. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. 2. Shop install and tighten nonhigh - strength bolts, except where high - strength bolts are indicated. 3. Shop install and tighten high - strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." a. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip - critical, direct - tension, or tensioned shear /bearing connections. 4. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of I. welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. K. Shop Priming: Shop prime steel, except surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar, surfaces to be field welded, surfaces to be high - strength bolted with slip - critical connections, and surfaces to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. it 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC -SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" or SSPC -SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. Surface Preparation: SSPC -SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." f 3. Surface Preparation: SSPC -SP 11 "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 4. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full I coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 ::st•��_::�.vr.,s� :+ arr, r+..+ .�:.aE..,su. +. +.cu.n,..,,,,.... ._.._.._ SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 5. Priming: Apply a 1 -coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System Guide No. 7.00" to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 1.3 Execution A. Erect structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates and set on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 1. Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of base or bearing plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Install and tighten nonhigh - strength bolts, except where high - strength bolts are indicated. E. Install and tighten high - strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip - critical, direct - tension, or tensioned shear /bearing connections. F. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used m correcting welding work. G. Shop and Field Quality Control: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop and field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. 2. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3. High - strength bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 4. In addition to visual inspection, welded connections will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 procedures. END OF SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 • SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each type of deck and accessory, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 2. Product certificates signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 3. Product test reports from a qualified testing agency. 4. Welder certificates. 5. Research /Evaluation Reports: Evidence of steel deck's compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Quality Assurance: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of steel deck. 1. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel." 2. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire - Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 3. FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM and listed in FM's "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1 -90 windstorm ratings. 1.2 Products A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 29, and the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm). 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: Per Structural drawings. B. Accessories: Steel deck manufacturer's standard accessory materials, including mechanical fasteners, closure strips, pour stops, and closures for deck. STEEL DECK 05310 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1010 through 1020 headed stud type, cold - finished carbon steel, AWS D1.1, Type B, with arc shields. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. E. Repair Paint: Lead- and chromate -free rust - inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P -664. 1.3 Execution A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. 2. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. 3. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to decking. 4. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. 5. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. a. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. B. Roof Deck Accessories: Install sump pans and sump plates, ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. C. Floor Deck Installation: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z- closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight - fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Weld shear connectors through deck to supporting frame according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Butt end joints of deck panels; do not overlap. Remove and discard arc shields after welding shear connectors. D. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 05310 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 05400 - COLD - FORMED METAL, FRAMING 1.1 General A. Structural Performance: Provide cold- formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads without deflections greater than the following: 1. Interior Load - Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. 2. Exterior Non - Load - Bearing Curtain -Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height. 3. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. B. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold- formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 3. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency. 4. Welder certificates. 5. Research /Evaluation Reports: Evidence of cold - formed metal framing's compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Quality Assurance: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of cold - formed metal framing. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data. 2. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." 3. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire- resistance- rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire - Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA -600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 4. Comply with HUD's "Prescriptive Method for Residential Cold- Formed Steel Framing." 1.2 Products COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating, Grade 33 (230) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and less; 50 (340) for minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and greater. B. Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel studs, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As required. 2. Flange Width: 1 -5/8 inches (41 mm). 3. Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, manufacturer's standard flange width, and minimum uncoated -steel thickness matching steel studs. C. Joist Framing: Manufacturer's standard C- shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As required. 2. Flange Width: 1 -5/8 inches (41 mm). 3. Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: a. Minimum Uncoated -Steel Thickness: Matching steel joists. b. Flange Width: 2 inches (51 mm), minimum. D. Fabricate steel - framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated. E. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123. F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel hex - headed bolts and carbon - steel nuts; and flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. G. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. H. Power - Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. I. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion - resistant- coated, self - drilling, self - threading steel drill screws. J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. K. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2 -1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. COLD- FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1 L. Thermal Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral -fiber blankets produced by combining glass or slag fibers with thermosetting resins. [ 1.3 Execution I A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. I B. Install cold - formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to ASTM C 1007, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold- formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. I 3. Install framing members in one -piece lengths. 4. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. 5. Install insulation in built -up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 6. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's 1 standard punched openings. C. Erection Tolerances: Install cold- formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from I_ plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. D. Load - Bearing Wall Installation: Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. L Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated, set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. '_ 1. Align studs vertically where wall - framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E.. 2. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. 3. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. 4. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, 1 5. or gusset plates. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. I 6. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full- height wall studs. I COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 7. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten at each stud intersection. 8. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, blocking, bracing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall - framing system. E. Non - Load - Bearing Curtain -Wall Installation: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. Space studs as indicated; set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to track, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Isolate non -load- bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 2. Install horizontal bridging in curtain -wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 54 inches (1370 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 3. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain- wall - framing system. F. Joist Installation: Install, align, and securely anchor perimeter joist track sized to match joists as indicated on Shop Drawings. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm). Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists as indicated on Shop Drawings. 2. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls and at spacings indicated. 3. Frame openings with built -up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated. 4. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. 5. Install bridging at each end of joists and at intervals indicated. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as indicated. 6. Secure joists to load - bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. 7. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold -down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist - framing assembly. G. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold- formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05400 COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 4 1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1 r 1 I. 1.. i i i SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication and erection. 2. Templates for anchor bolts. 1.2 Products A. General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: As follows: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Tubing: Cold- formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. 4. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. C. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified - alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P -664 and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc - dust - content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC -Paint 20. E. Fasteners: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc- plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory - packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. G. Concrete Fill: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air- entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. H. Fabrication, General: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. 1. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 2. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 I. Steel Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3 and as follows: J. 1. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2- by -2 -1/2 -inch steel flat bars, spaced 18 inches apart. 2. Bar Rungs: 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) diameter #6 deformed steel reinforcing bars, spaced 12 inches o.c. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug -weld and grind smooth. 4. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. 5. Galvanize exterior ladders and safety cages. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. 1. Galvanize plates. K. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate from shapes and to sizes indicated. 1. Galvanize lintels located in exterior walls. 2. Drill or punch for attachments as detailed prior to galvanizing. L. Shelf Angles: Fabricate to sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4 -inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c. 1. Galvanize shelf angles to be installed in exterior walls. 2. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast -in -place concrete. M. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural -steel framework as necessary to complete the Work. Fabricate from structural steel of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded anchors at 24 inches(600 mm) o.c. N. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation with other work. O. Pipe Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4 -inch- minimum steel plate. 2. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 -inch thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. P. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Shop prime ferrous -metal items not indicated to be galvanized. 1. Hot -dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. 1.3 Execution A. Installation, General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in -place construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections, unless otherwise indicated. Do not weld, cut, or abrade galvanized surfaces. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill space between bollard and sleeve solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. D. Anchor bollards to existing construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts. Provide four 3/4- inch (19 -mm) anchors at each bollard, embedded at least 4 inches (100 mm) in existing concrete. E. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface. F. Touch up shop paint after erection. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and paint with the same material as used for shop painting. G. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO, 98294 I i i 1 1_ I. jA t SECTION 05810 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 1.1 General A. Submittals: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1. 1. Product data including specifications, installation instructions, details, profiles, and finishes. B. Fire - Resistance Ratings: Not less than the rating of adjacent construction. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Basis of design and specification is MM Systems. Equal products by the following manufacturers are subject to review and acceptance by Architect. 1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. Metalines, Inc. 5. Pawling Corp. 6. Tremco, Inc. B. General: provide joint cover assemblies complete with all covers, trims, mounting assemblies, and miscellaneous components as required for complete and furnished installation in each condition. C. Seismic Seals: Two single- layered elastomeric profiles retained in frames at wide joints designed to withstand earthquake movement. At manufacturer's option, omit interior profile for interior application. D. Fire Barriers: Tested in maximum joint width condition per ANSI /UL 263, NFPA 251, U.B.C. 43 -1, or ASTM E 119. E. Moisture Barrier Where Applicable: Continuous, flexible, vinyl moisture barrier under covers. F. Fire -Rated Joint Covers: With fire barrier seals to provide fire - resistive rating not less than the rating of adjacent construction. G. Metal Floor -to -Floor Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide continuous, extruded, metal frames of profile indicated. 1. Exposed Cover: One frame on each side of joint supporting floor plate and filler. 2. Flat Cover Plates: Extend flat plates to lap each side of joint. 3. Self- Centering Cover Plates: Concealed centering device permitting free movement of cover plate on both sides. H. Floor -to -Wall Joints: Frame on floor side only, unless wall side frame required by manufacturer. 1. Angle Cover Plates: Attach angle cover plates to wall. EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810 -1 hie; ",(:;'t;dh:t:v:tr, Y'.+: SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 I. Wall, Ceiling, and Soffit Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies in intersecting planes of same appearance. J• 1. Fixed Metal Cover Plates: Anchor frame on one side permitting free movement on other side. 2. Floating Metal Cover Plates: Cover plate secured to frames permitting free movement on both sides. 3. Self- Centering Cover Plates: Concealed centering device permitting cover plate free movement on both sides. 4. Flexible Filler: Secure the approved flexible filler between frames to compress and expand with movement. Compression Seals: Preformed, elastomeric extrusions having internal baffle system with lubricant and adhesive for installation. K. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by AA. 1. Mill Finish: AA -M10 (unspecified mill finish). 2. Class I, Clear- Anodized Finish: AA- M12C22A41. 3. Class I, Color- Anodized Finish: AA- M12C22A42/A44. a. Color: Selected from within standard industry colors and color density range. 4. Baked Enamel Finish: AA- C12C42R1x. Comply with manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting modified acrylic enamel. b. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 5. High- Performance Organic Coating: AA- C12C42R1x. a. Fluoropolymer Two -Coat Coating System: Primer and fluoropolymer topcoat; 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin. Comply with AAMA 605.2. 1) Resin Manufacturers: Ausimont USA, Inc. (Hylar 5000) or Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500). 2) Color and Gloss: Selected from manufacturer's standard choices for color and gloss. 6. Factory -prime concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete and masonry surfaces when installed. L. Natural Satin Bronze Finish: CDA Designation M32, mechanical finish, directional textured, medium satin. M. Stainless Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual." 1. Bright, Cold - Rolled Unpolished Finish: AISI No. 213 finish, 2. Bright, Directional Polish: AISI No. 3 finish. N. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory finish, EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 05810 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION 1.3 Execution MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Preparation: Comply with these specifications and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations including preparation of substrate, applying materials, and protecting installed units. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions for anchoring to substrates or forming recesses into substrates for placement and grouting frames. C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required. Install in true alignment in relationship to established lines and levels. Allow adequate free movement for metal thermal expansion and contraction. Set floor covers flush with adjacent finished floor materials. Install wall, ceiling, roof, and soffit covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. D. Extruded Preformed Seals: Install seals to comply with manufacturer's instructions and with minimum number of end joints. E. Elastomeric Sealant Joint Assemblies: Seal end joints and transitions according to manufacturer's directions. F. Seismic Seals: Install seals according to manufacturer's instructions. G. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers, including transitions and end joints according to manufacturer's instructions so that fire -rated construction is continuous. H. Cleaning and Protection: Remove protective covering only after finish work in adjacent areas is complete. Clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 05810 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 1.1 General A. Submittals: Submit wood treatment data, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated materials. 1.2 Products A. Lumber, General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency. B. Wood - Preservative - Treated Materials: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb /cu. ft. (4.0 kg /cu. m). After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg /cu. m). C. Fire - Retardant - Treated Materials: Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire - retardant - treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. All wood products installed are to be fire retardant. D. Concealed Boards: Provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Species and Grade: Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common per NELMA rules. 2. Species and Grade: Northern species, No. 3 Common or Standard per NLGA rules. 3. Species and Grade: Mixed southern pine, No. 2 per SPIB rules. 4. Species and Grade: Western woods, Standard per WCLIB rules or No. 3 Common per WWPA rules. E. Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. 1. Power - Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION 1.3 A. B. Execution MPI JOB NO. 98294 Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, other construction. C. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and standards. END OF SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate and similar supports to allow attachment of according to applicable codes and recognized •rxa^,, „s?n't.a<si +:xea,'r(tu.x ?rlar; SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit Samples for each finish and type of siding and paneling. 1.2 Products A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard,” for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. B. Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood." C. Fire - Retardant Treatment: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire - retardant chemicals per AWPA C20; exterior type or interior Type A as required. D. Plastic laminate - color to be selected from standard color samples. L1.3 Execution l- A. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation, for a minimum of 24 hours. L B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full - length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners. D. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. END OF SECTION 06200 i FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.1 General A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. B. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large - scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 2. Samples of solid - surfacing materials. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. D. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.2 Products A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide interior architectural woodwork by one of the following: B. High - Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. C. Solid- Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Corian; DuPont Polymers. b. Surell; Formica Corporation. c. Gibraltar; Wilsonart International, Div. of Premark International, Inc. D. Fire - Retardant - Treated Materials: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire - retardant chemical formulations to comply with AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), Exterior Type or Interior Type A. Use fire - retardant - treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln -dry material after treatment. E. Fire - Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire - retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame- spread rating of 25 or less and smoke - developed rating of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 F. Fire - Retardant Fiberboard: Medium - density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire - retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame - spread rating of 25 or less and smoke - developed rating of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. G. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire- retardant - treated softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln -dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. H. Fabrication, General: Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide [Premium) [Custom) [Economy] grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. K. Solid- Surfacing- Material Countertops: As follows: 1. Solid- Surfacing - Material Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid - surfacing material complying with the following requirements: a. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. 3. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop - applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid - surfacing - material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. L. Shop Finishing: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. 1.3 Execution A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before installation. B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with WIC Section 26 for the same grade specified in this Section for type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head screws sized for 1 -inch (25 -mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. No. 10 wafer -head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Submittals: Submit product data for each type of product specified, including data substantiating that materials comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cold- Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: a. ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div. b. Euclid Chemical Co. c. Karnak Chemical Corporation. d. Koppers Industries, Inc. e. Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc. B. Bituminous Dampproofing, General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application. 1. Odor Elimination: Provide material warranted by manufacturer to be odor free after drying for 24 hours under normal conditions. C. Cold- Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: Asphalt -based emulsions recommended by the manufacturer for dampproofing. 1. Trowel Grade: Emulsified asphalt mastic complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III or IV. D. Primer: Asphalt primer complying with ASTM D 41, for asphalt -based dampproofing. E. Glass Fabric: Woven glass fabric, treated with asphalt, complying with ASTM D 1668, Type I. F. Protection Course, Board Type: Premolded, 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) thick, multi-ply, semirigid board, with a mineral- stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt - saturated felt and faced on one side with polyethylene film. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Protection Course II; ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div. b. Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co. c. PC -2 Protection Course; Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc. 1.3 Execution A. Preparation: Clean substrate and comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. 1. Install cant strips and similar accessories as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION rw �na�.w vX�aYi H6�4VeR`TM.'N:r;M.•MrtKY:.Y.+'f: CMfrFOL MtY. rrNl r lT.cens�v.b.u...r.�............ MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. 3. Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. 4. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. 5. Protection of Other Work: Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of adjoining work. B. Application: Apply dampproofing where indicated on Drawings. Apply 1 or 2 coats as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Reinforcement: At changes in plane or as shown, install lapped course of glass fabric in first coat of dampproofing compound. 2. Apply horizontal dampproofing to concrete slab and turn up walls minimum 6 inches all around. Apply vertical dampproofing down walls from finished -grade line overlapping slab turn -up do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when the Project is completed. C. Cold - Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: Apply on either exterior or interior surfaces. 1. Trowel Grade: Apply at a minimum rate of 7 gal. /100 sq. ft. (2.8 L /sq. m), to produce an average, dry -film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) but not less than 30 mils (0.8 mm) at any point. D. Protect dampproofing membrane from damage until backfill is completed. Remove overspray and spilled materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. E. Protection Course: Comply with dampproofing materials manufacturer's recommendations for method of support or attaching of protection materials. Support with spot application of trowel -grade mastic where not otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 - 2 I 1 i 1 I 1 0 I. 1 L 1 I i SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION 1.1 General A. Submittals: Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test- response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, ASTM E 119, or ASTM E 136 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.2 Products A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Unfaced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III. 1. Nominal Density: Not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg /cu. m) nor more than 1.65 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg /cu. m). 2. Thermal Resistivity: 4.13 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu x in. at 75 deg F (28.6 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 3. Surface - Burning Characteristics: Smoke - developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively. C. Foil- Faced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and III; faced on one side with foil - scrim -kraft vapor retarder. 1. Nominal Density: 1.5 lb /cu. ft. (24 kg /cu. m). 2. Thermal Resistivity: 4.13 deg F x h x sq. ft. /Btu x in. at 75 deg F (28.6 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 3. Surface - Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively. D. Fire - Retardant, Reinforced - Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either a nonwoven grid of nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 lb /1000 sq. ft. (10 kg /100 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.1317 perm (7.53 ng /Pa x s x sq. m) and flame- spread and smoke - developed indices of not more than 5 and 75, respectively. Color: white. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or equal: a. DURA -SKRIM 2FR; Raven Industries, Inc. b. Griffolyn T -55 FR; Reef Industries, Inc., Griffolyn Div. E. Vapor - Retarder Tape: Pressure - sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 -1 r. x• }.`K�Y37iKAttY.RG.;t�11:!'::?; Lkii�.(�:�it 1... !;'Sii R!t'•A^.'JW1iip:YY:1K.1unw . vv. w...,..._» SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 F. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. G. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated with self - locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. 2. Spindle: Copper- coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inches (2.67 min) in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 1 E. 3. Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after installation, protect ends with capped self - locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent LI , retention of cap. H. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1.3 Execution Installation, General: Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. 1. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. 2. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 3. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. B. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system. C. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 -2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 07242 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 1.1 General A. Definitions: Exterior insulation and finish systems (EIFS) refer to exterior assemblies consisting of an inner layer of board insulation, an outer layer of a glass- fiber - mesh - reinforced base coat applied directly to board insulation, and a textured protective finish coat. Systems refer to EIMA classification Class PB EIFS. System manufacturer refers to EIFS manufacturer. B. Physical Properties: EIFS complying with performance standards and structural performance in "EIMA Guideline Specification for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB," including wind load per ASTM E 330 as indicated. C. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and configurations within system and between system and construction penetrating it, termination details, and attachments to construction behind system. 2. Samples for each finish, color, texture, and pattern specified. 3. Installer Certificates: Signed by system manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. 4. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers or a third -party agency approved by system manufacturer certifying that insulation and joint sealants comply with requirements. 5. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer. 6. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of current products by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 7. EIFS Contractor and Sealant Installer Installation Cards: complete, sign, and submit to Building Department in accordance with ICBO Evaluation Service Report. D. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system. Installer shall be trained in manufacturer's system, have a minimum of five years experience in projects of similar scope, and be approved by the Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau. E. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: System assemblies and components with the following fire - test - response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 450 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84. F. Mockups: Construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required. Mockup for panels over existing concrete fascia shall be full- height. G. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealers, windows, and doors, are EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07242 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind EIFS. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Basis of Bid is "Outsulation Plus" by Dryvit Systens, Inc. Contractor may propose equal systems for review from the following: 1. Pleko Products, Inc. 2. Sto Corp.; Sto Finish Systems Div. 3. Stuc -O -Flex International, Inc. B. Compatibility: Substrates, adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish - coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Finish Coat: Architect's selections from system manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns for type of finish coat indicated. D. Grid tape at all joints of exterior gypsum sheathing: comply with manufacturer's requirements, E. Air /weather barrier: "Backstop" air /weather barrier as manufactured by Dryvit Systems, Inc. Trowel on minimum 3/32 inch thickness per manufacturer's requirements. F. Flashing tape: install at all penetrations per manufacturer's requirements. G. Adhesive: "Primus" adhesive as manufactured by Dryvit Systems, Inc. Comply with notch trowel vertical pattern per manufacturer's requirements. H. Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with system manufacturer's requirements and ASTM C 578, Type IV for boards sized not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in thickness indicated but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) or less than that allowed by system manufacturer. J. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali- resistant, open -weave glass -fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf /in. (21 dN /cm) per EIMA 105.01, complying with ASTM D 578 and not less than 4.2 oz. /sq. yd. (142 g /sq. m) at reveals, 6 oz. /sq. yd. for typical wall installation, and 12 oz. /sq. yd. for top of parapet. Base -Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Job -mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, natural color; clean, washed, silica sand complying with ASTM C 897 and system manufacturer's requirements; alkali- resistant chopped glass fibers; and polymer - emulsion admixture for base -coat use. "Genesis" base coat as manufactured by Dryvit Systems, Inc. a. Top of parapet: "Dryflex" as manufactured by Dryvit Systems, Inc. K. Finish -Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard factory -mixed formulation of polymer- emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07242 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 Acrylic finish coat with DPR and PMR as manufactured by Dryvit Systems, Inc., integral color with sand pebble fine finish. 1. Top of parapet: Provide standard finish coat, then two coats "Weatherlastic Smooth" elastomeric finish. L. Water: Potable. M. Portland Cement: Type I or II. N. Trim Accessories: Type to suit conditions indicated and complying with ASTM C 1063; zinc alloy. 1. Drainage strip: exterior -grade PVC with .25 inch diameter holes spaced 3 inches on center, comply with ASTM D 1784 -81 and ASTM C 1063 -94. 2. Soffit drip screeds: vented drip reveal as manufactured by Fry Reglet and as shown on drawings. 0. Joint Sealant System: Shall be as acceptable to EIFS system manufacturer as compatible with EIFS system, and shall be one of the following: 1. Tremco, Inc. 2. Sealant: Dymeric 3. Primer: Primer #1 4. Pecora Corp. 5. Sealant: Dynatrol II 6. Primer: Primer type P75 7. Sonneborn 8. Sealant: Sonolastic NP II 9. Primer: Primer 733 10. Products Research & Chemical Corp. 11. Sealant: PRC Rubber Caulk 350 12. Primer: Primer #17 P. Backer Rod: Dow Ethafoam or equal. Q. Bond Breaker: Depends on surface; contact sealant manufacturer for recommendations. R. Sealant color to be as selected by Architect for match to EIFS materials. 1.3 Execution A. Comply with system manufacturer's written instructions for installation of system as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Exterior Cement Board: Comply with cement board manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Cover exterior cement board with a Layer of asphalt- saturated organic felt. C. Adhesive - attach insulation to substrate by method complying with manufacturer's requirements and DS 218 as specified by Dryvit Systems, Inc. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07242 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long edges oriented horizontally with vertical joints staggered in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Begin first course from a level base line and work upward. 2. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners of window and door openings. a. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from joints in sheathing. b. Offset joints of insulation not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from aesthetic reveals. 3. Interlock ends at internal and external corners. Abut boards tightly at joints and fill gaps with insulation. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. Form joints for sealant application wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 4. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; smooth surface film created by extrusion process; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 5. Treat exposed edges of insulation board to comply with system manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation. D. Install expansion joints at locations indicated, where required by system manufacturer, where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS, where EIFS adjoins dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction and at floor lines in multilevel wood -frame construction. E. Install control joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect: 1. For wall areas defined by the placement of control joints; area not to exceed 150 sq. ft. (13.9 sq. m). 2. At a maximum spacing of 10 feet (3 m) in any direction. 3. At a maximum spacing of 12 feet (3.7 m) in any direction, with no panel exceeding 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m) in area. 4. At a maximum spacing of 18 feet (5.4 m) in any direction, with no panel exceeding 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m) in area. 5. Where required so no panel has a width -to- length ratio of more than 2- 1/2:1. 6. Where panels formed by system change in size, extend joints full width or height of protective coating. 7. Above and below window and door openings. F. Install trim accessories at locations indicated. Mechanically fasten accessories to structure. G. Cover insulation with reinforcing mesh and fasten through insulation to structure. H. Apply base coat over and into reinforcing mesh in thickness specified by system manufacturer to produce a flush, uniform surface with mesh fully embedded and prepared to receive finish coat. Apply in two separate passes. EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 07242 - 4 i`1uJai J :g SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 I. Apply finish coat over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample. J. Installation of Joint Sealants: Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and in "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB." Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. K. Field Quality Control: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field quality- control tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace EIFS that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with requirements. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements. END OF SECTION 07242 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 6_11 -. (EIFS CONTRACTOR NAME) Completion Date: THE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW: CONFORMS TO (EIFS MANUFACTURER NAME) RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND SECTION (S) OF ICBO ES, INC., EVALUATION REPORT ER- . Address of Structure: INSTALLATION A. Substrate Type and Tolerance B. Weather- resistive Barrier (where applicable) C. EIFS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Adhesive and /or Fasteners Insulation Reinforcing Fabric Base Coat Finish Product Component Names: Adhesive(s) Fasteners (mech) Base Coat Reinforcing Fabric Finish Coat (s) CONFORMS av%).0_,,OSropAt :i0V)",/$80.4)'. � S 1pl4 O• D. The information entered above is offered in testimony that the EIFS Installation conforms with the EIFS manufacturer's installation methods and procedures, and the EIFS manufacturer's ES report. NOTE: An installation card shall be received from the Sealant Installer indicating that the sealant installation conforms with the EIFS evaluation report and sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures must accompany this declaration. EIFS Contractor Company Name and Address: Signature of responsible Officer: Type Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number: ( ) cc: Original: Building Department (Must be submitted with sealant Copy: EIFS Manufacturer installer declaration.) FIGURE 8— INSTALLATION CARD (SEALANT INSTALLER NAME) Completion Date: THE SEALANT INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW: CONFORMS TO (EIFS MANUFACTURER NAME) AND (SEALANT MANUFACTURER'S NAME) RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND SECTION(S) OF ICBO ES, INC., EVALUATION REPORT ER- Address of Structure: Product Component Names: A. B. C. D. INSTALLATION Designer's requirements, details and instructions Sealant manufacturer's details and requirements Exterior insulation manufacturer's requirements Primer(s) Sealers Bond Breakers Sealant Materials CONFORMS O �o 4 G4 4� • �5� `.J The information entered above is offered in testimony that the Sealant installation conforms with the sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures, and the EIFS manufacturer's evaluation report. Sealant Installer Company Name and Address: Signature of responsible Officer: Type Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number: ( ) cc: Original: Copies: Building Department EIFS Manufacturer EIFS Contractor Sealant Manufacturer (Must be submitted with EIFS contractor declaration.) FIGURE 9— INSTALLATION CARD SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 07412 - MANUFACTURED WALL PANELS 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit Shop Drawings, installation instructions, color samples, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel assemblies. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Design basis is BHP Steel Building Products "Nu -Wave Corrugated" factory- finished metal panel system with matching factory- finished trim, flashing, and accessories, or equal by one of the following manufacturers: a. Atas Aluminum Corp. b. Berridge Manufacturing Co. c. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc. d. Carlisle Engineered Metals. e. Metal Building Components, Inc. f. Metal Sales Mfg. Corp. g. Modern Metal Systems, Inc. h. Petersen Aluminum Corp. i, Reynolds Metals Company. j. Robertson: H.H. Robertson Company. k. Smith Steelite, Inc. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275); structural quality. C. Exposed Finish for Exterior Steel Panels: Coil coated with 2 -coat fluoropolymer according to ASTM A 755 (ASTM A 755M), composed of inhibitive primer and color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil (0.023 mm); in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Prime Coat for Concealed Surfaces: Light - colored, baked -on polyester primer coat with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm). E. Exterior Steel Panels: 24 guage, galvanized steel sheet. F. Fasteners: Self- tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self - locking rivets and bolts, end - welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. G. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, self - extinguishing, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross - linked, polyolefin -foam strips. H. Sealing Tape: Pressure - sensitive, polyisobutylene tape with release paper backing. I. Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone - rubber sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer. J. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil (0.4 -mm) dry film thickness per coat. MANUFACTURED WALL PANELS 07412 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1.3 Execution A. Examination: Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements indicated for conditions affecting performance of metal panel walls. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed to meet requirements of panel manufacturer. Do not proceed with wall panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Panel Installation: Comply with panel manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installation. Anchor panels securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted. Install panels with concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self - tapping screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self - tapping screws. rf C. Accessories: Install components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, seam covers, flashings, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. D. Weatherproofing: Install weatherseal to prevent air and moisture penetration. Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer. 1. Flash and seal panels at ends and intersections with other materials with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather. 2. Seal panel end laps with a bead of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 4. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and apply sealant and back -up according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions. E. Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous l j coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. F. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the Work that have been damaged i ) ) or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. G. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon as each panel is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during construction. H. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 20 -year finish warranty. END OF SECTION 07412 MANUFACTURED WALL PANELS 07412 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.1 1.2 MPI JOB NO. 98294 General A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples for each item specified. Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Reglets: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Hickman: W.P. Hickman Co. c. Keystone Flashing Company. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G 90 (ASTM A 526M, Z 275), commercial quality, or ASTM A 527, G 90 (ASTM A 527M, Z 275), lock - forming quality, hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for painting; not less than 0.0396 inch (1.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. C. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper - bearing lead sheet, minimum thickness of 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) except not less than 0.0937 inch (2.4 inm) thick for applications where burning (welding) is involved. D. Concealed Through -Wall Flashing: 0.0156 -inch- (0.4 -mm -) thick stainless steel. E. Reglets: Profile indicated; 0.0187 -inch- (0.5 -mm -) thick stainless steel. F. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: As follows: 1. Solder: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50. 2. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60. 3. Fasteners: Noncorrosive metal. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. 4. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC -Paint 12, asbestos free, solvent type. 5. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. 6. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. 7. Elastomeric Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 8. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2 -part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam - cementing compound. 9. Adhesives: Type recommended for waterproof and weather- resistant seaming and adhesive. 10. Clips, Straps, Anchoring Devices, and Similar Accessories: Compatible with material being installed. G. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. 1. Gutters: 0.040 -inch- (1.0 -mm -) thick Galvanized Steel. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Downspouts: 0.024 -inch- (0.6 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 3. Conductor Heads: 0.032 -inch- (0.8 -mm -) galvanized steel. 4. Splash Pans: 0.0187 -inch- (0.5 -mm -) thick stainless steel. 5. Roof -Drain Flashing: 4.0 lb /sq. ft. (1.6 -mm- thick), hard - tempered lead. 6. Scuppers: 16 oz. /sq. ft. (0.55 -mm- thick) copper. 7. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: 0.0187 -inch- (0.5 -mm -) galvanized steel. 8. Copings: 0.050 -inch- (1.2 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 9. Base Flashing: 0.0187 -inch- (0.5 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 10. Counterflashing: 0.0187 -inch- (0.5 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 11. Flashing Receivers: 0.0156 -inch- (0.4 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 12. Drip Edges: 0.0217 -inch- (0.55 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 13. Equipment Support Flashing: 0.0276 -inch- (0.7 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 14. Roof - Penetration Flashing: 0.0276 -inch- (0.7 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 15. Roof Expansion -Joint Cover: 0.0276 -inch- (0.7 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. 16. Roof -to -Wall Expansion -Joint Cover: 0.0336 -inch- (0.85 -mm -) thick galvanized steel. H. Coil- Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet Finish: 2 -coat fluoropolymer Hylar 5000 or Kynar 500. 1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. 1.3 Execution A. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible. 1. Roof -Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. B. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Pretinning is not required for lead. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. F. Separations: Separate noncompatible metals or corrosive substrates with a coating of asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 G. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap -in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and bed with sealant. H. Roof - Drainage System: Coordinate installation with roofing installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep- sloped roofs with roofing installation. I. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member. J. Roof - Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 07841- THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 1.1 General A. Performance Requirements: Provide through- penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire - resistance rating of assembly penetrated. 1. F -Rated Systems: Provide through- penetration firestop systems with F- ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire - resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through- penetration firestop systems with T- ratings indicated, as well as F- ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire- resistive shaft enclosures. c. Penetrations located in construction containing fire - protection -rated openings. d. Penetrating items larger than 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross - sectional area. 3. For through- penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. a. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture - resistant through- penetration firestop systems. b. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. c. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through- penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. 4. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame - spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke - developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. B. Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each type of product specified, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: For each through- penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through- penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 3. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through- penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide through- penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Paragraph: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock- Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow -up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through- penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 and bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.2 Products A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through - penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. DAP Inc. 3. Firestop Systems Inc. 4. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5. Instant Firestop Mfg. Inc. 6. International Protective Coatings Corp. 7. Isolatek International. 8. Nelson Firestop Products. 9. NUCO Industries. 10. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 11. Specified Technologies Inc. 12. 3M Fire Protection Products. 13. Tremco. 14. United States Gypsum Company. B. Firestopping, General: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through - penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through- penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Accessories: Provide components for each through- penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Paragraph. Use only components specified by through- penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming /damming /backing materials. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. D. General: Provide through- penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through- Penetration Firestop System Schedule on the Drawings by reference THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841- 2 1' i i 1 '.l•;Y' :`.ify.:');. <.M�1: ".r. •�:T.'::t;t::': t1.(S.5u 't ?.Tt`r.'#.i•. .. +....a SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 to the types of materials described below. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials. 1. Cast -in -Place Firestop Devices: Factory - assembled devices for use in cast -in -place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete I 2. Latex Sealants: Single- component latex formulations that after cure do not re- emulsify formwork, and a neoprene gasket. during exposure to moisture. i , 3. Firestop Devices: Factory- assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. 4. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum- foil -faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. 5. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water - resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. 6. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single - component intumescent elastomeric sheets with I„ aluminum foil on one side. 7. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. I� 8. Pillows /Bags: Reusable, heat - expanding pillows /bags consisting of glass -fiber cloth cases filed with a combination of mineral- fiber, water - insoluble expansion agents and fire - retardant additives. 9. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone -based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 10. Silicone Sealants: Moisture - curing, single- component, silicone- based, neutral - curing elastomeric sealants. 1.3 Execution A. General: Install through- penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Paragraph and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming /damming /backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. END OF SECTION 07841 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841- 3 11 . SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS • 1.1 General A. Provide caulking and sealants as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings, and elsewhere as required to provide a positive barrier against the passage of moisture and air. Fill all joints between like and dissimilar materials. B. Provide firestopping at penetrations and material gaps and junctions in a fire resistive construction. C. System Description: 1. Fire -rated construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. 2. Smoke barrier construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types of construction, and at all separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps. D. Submittals: I. Manufacturer's printed literature and color cards for all products proposed for use in this work. 2. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 3. UL or Warnock Hersey approval reports and assembly details for each type of fire - rated joint or penetration firestopping situation anticipated and corresponding assembly proposed. If additional penetrations or joint conditions become apparent as construction progresses provide additional details to the Architect for review. 4. Maintain copies of the approved penetration firestopping and fire -rated joint system details on site for the use of the Inspector in confirming the system installation. • 1.2 Products A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. Coordinate with contractors for other portions of the work for material compatibility and for proper scheduling of previous and subsequent installations such as painting and water repellants. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Color of firestopping sealants shall be readily identifiable as to type, distinguishable from non -rated caulks or sealants. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 C. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated, complying with ASTM C 920 requirements. D. Elastomeric Sealants: 1. The following manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include: a. Dow Corning b. Pecora Corp. c. Tremco inc. d. General Electric e. Sonneborn 2. Sealants for use with EIFS systems are specified in Section 07240. E. One- Component Polyurethane Sealant: Polyurethane- based, one -part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS TT-S- 00230, Class A, Type I (self - leveling) unless Type II recommended by manufacturer for application shown. F. One -Part, Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 12 -1/2. G. Multi -Part, Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. H. Acrylic Sealant: One -part, nonsag, solvent - release - curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S- 00230, or both, with capability, when tested per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of application without failing adhesively or cohesively: 1. Maximum cyclic movement capability: plus or minus 7.5 percent. Fire -rated penetration systems: Provide caulk or putty intumescent -type sealant system materials as required by penetration or joint type meeting the requirements for rated joints under UL or Warnock - Hersey approvals; products of one manufacturer as follows, or equal based on substantiating listing agency acceptance: 1. 3M 2. Hilti 3. Bio Fireshield J. Joint Primer /Sealer: Provide type of joint primer /sealer recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. K. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant- contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self - adhesive tape where applicable. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 r SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1 L. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam, or other flexible, permanent, durable I nonabsorptive material as recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant. M. Fire - resistant sealant systems: use only those primers, joint backers and packing, and Imiscellaneous materials approved by the listing agency in specific details for each type of firestopping penetration or fire -rated joint assembly. 1.3 Execution A. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. B. Joint Preparation: 1. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture, and other substances which could interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2. Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer /sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. C. Installation 1. Set joint filler units at proper depth or position in joint to coordinate with other work, including installation of bond breakers, backer rods, and sealants. Do not leave voids or gaps between ends of joint filler units. 2. Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for application indicated. 3. Install bond breaker tape where indicated and where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly. Prevent three sided bending within the joint. 4. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 ........rn�.w.+ rR +wx'.^w;�1eS.:YMY �v.+ Y +•nfn�R..;. #.1Nf'.;tnM.('tWf'fn SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 5. Install sealant to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitation, measured at center (thin) section of bead: 6. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep. 7. For joints sealed with non - elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a depth in range of 75% to 125% of joint width. 8. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. 9. Do not overheat hot - applied sealants. 10. Recess exposed edges of gaskets and exposed joint fillers slightly behind adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown, so that compressed units will not protrude from joints. 11. Fire - resistant sealant systems: Apply all backings, putties, caulks, sealants, etc. required for a complete assembly per the approved details of the required fire - resistance of the wall within which the penetration or joint occurs. All installations shall be in accordance with requirements of the manufacturer for handling, installation, and final arrangement of components. D. Cure And Protection 1. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Advise Contractor of procedures required for cure and protection or joint sealers during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at time of substantial completion. 2. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's instructions for products and applications indicated. 3. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1193. 4. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4.. SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.1 General A. Submit Product Data for each type of door and frame specified. B. Quality Assurance: Comply with ANSI /SDI 100. MPI JOB NO. 98294 C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: NFPA 80, identical to assemblies tested per ASTM E 152, and labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Benchmark Commercial Doors. 3. Ceco Door Products. 4. Copco Door Co. 5. Curries Co. 6. Deansteel Manufacturing Co. 7. Fenestra Corp. 8. Kewanee Corp. 9. Mesker Door, Inc. 10. Pioneer Industries. 11. Republic Builders Products. 12. Steelcraft. B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M). C. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial quality, or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality. D. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M), commercial quality, or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, with A 60 or G 60 (Z 180 or ZF 180) coating designation, mill phosphatized. E. Steel Doors: Provide 1 -3/4 -inch- (44 -mm -) thick doors of materials and ANSI /SDI 100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy -duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478 -inch- (1.2- mm- ) thick cold - rolled steel sheet faces. 2. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy -duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick galvanized steel sheet faces. F. Frames: Provide frames for doors, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI /SDI 100; fabricate to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. For interior frames provide units with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners, formed from 0.0478 -inch- (1.2 -mm -) thick cold - rolled steel for openings 48 inches (1220 mm) or less in width and from 0.0598 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick steel for openings over 48 inches (1220 mm) in width. 2. For exterior frames provide units with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners, formed from 0.0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick galvanized steel sheet. 3. Door Silencers: 3 on strike jambs of single -door frames and 2 on heads of double -door frames; non -rated and non - weather - stripped doors only. 4. Plaster Guards: Provide where mortar might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 5. Grout: As specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117. H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot - rolled steel sheet. I. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to SDI 107. J. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359 -inch- (0.9 -mm -) thick steel or 0.040 -inch- (1 -mm -) thick aluminum. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw- applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. K. Finishes, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 1. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. L. Galvanized Steel Sheet Finishes: Comply with SDI 112 and the following: 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified to comply with ASTM A 780. 2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20, high -zinc- dust - content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 3. Factory Priming for Field - Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air -dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. a. Shop Primer: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P -641, Type II. M. Steel Sheet Finishes: Comply with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1." STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 j.' 1 L to SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 I. 1. Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces according to SSPC -SP 1. Remove mill scale and rust to comply with SSPC -SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC -SP 8 (Pickling). 2. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating suited to organic coating applied over it. 3. Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field - applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. f 1.3 Execution A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. Install at least 3 anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. 3. In in -place gypsum board partitions, install knock -down, slip -on, drywall frames. 4. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI /SDI 100. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke - Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105. D. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air - drying primer. E. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 .rf ^xrJt SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; fire ratings; construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking, mortises, holes, and cutouts; requirements for veneer matching and factory finishing; and other pertinent data. 2. Samples of actual materials in small sections for each face material and finish. B. AWI Quality Standard: AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 3. Graham Manufacturing Corp. 4. Haley Brothers, Inc. 5, Ideal Wood Products, Inc. 6. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. 7. V -T Industries Inc. 8. Weyerhaeuser Co. B. Doors for Transparent Finish: As follows: 1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). 2. Faces: Red oak, plain sliced. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Pair and Set Match: Provide for pairs of doors and for doors hung in adjacent sets. C. Doors for Opaque Finish: As follows: 1. Grade: Economy. 2. Faces: Hardboard. D. Interior Solid -Core Veneer -Faced Doors: Contractor's option from the following: 1. Core: Particleboard core. 2. Core: Glued -block core. 3. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. E. Interior Solid -Core Hardboard -Faced Doors: Contractor's option from the following: 1. Core: Particleboard core. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -1 err,•...., SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Construction: Hardboard faces glued directly to core with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces are applied. F. Fire -Rated Doors: As follows: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral -core construction as required to provide fire rating indicated. 2. Edge Construction: Manufacturer's standard laminated -edge construction with improved screw - holding capability and split resistance. 3. Pairs: Furnish formed -steel edges and astragals for pairs of fire -rated doors, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pairs: Provide fire -rated pairs with fire - retardant stiles that are labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed -steel edges and astragals. G. Blocking: Provide blocking for particleboard -core, mineral -core, and hollow -core doors as necessary to eliminate need for through - bolting hardware. For mineral -core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw - holding capability. H. Factory fit doors to suit frame- opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire - rated doors. I. Contractor's option: Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed -steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire -rated doors. J. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. K. Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 1.3 Execution A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. B. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. C. Factory- Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory- Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at Project site. END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211- 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to product data, submit the following: 1. Access door schedule including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling details, latching or locking provisions, and other pertinent installation data. 2. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of customized access doors and frames. B. Quality Assurance: Provide fire -rated access doors that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire - test - response characteristics per test method as indicated below, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Test Method for Vertical Installations: ASTM E 152. 2. Test Method for Horizontal Installations: ASTM E 119. 1.2 Products Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products Inc. 2. Bar -Co, Inc. Div., Alfab, Inc. 3. Cesco Products. 4. Elmdor Manufacturing Co. 5. J.L. Industries. 6. Karp Associates, Inc. 7. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 8. Milcor, Inc. 9. Nystrom, Inc. 10. The Williams Bros. Corporation of America. B. Zinc- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Electrolytic zinc- coated steel sheet with Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting. C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, Type 304 with No. 4 finish according to ASTM A 480 /A 480M. D. Noninsulated, Fire -Rated Doors for Walls: Self- latching units consisting of frame, trim, door, and hardware, including automatic closer, interior latch release, and complying with the following requirements: 1. Fire - Protection Rating for Walls: 1 -1/2 hours. E. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Trim: Units consisting of frame with exposed trim, door, hardware, and complying with the following requirements: 1. Prime painted units at GWB walls. 2. Stainless steel units, #4 finish, at toilet room walls. ACCESS DOORS 08305 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION 3. Frame: 0.0598 -inch- (1.52 -mm -) thick zinc- coated steel sheet. 4. Frame: 0.0625 -inch- (1.59 -mm -) thick stainless -steel sheet. 5. Door: 0.0598 -inch- (1.52 -mm -) thick zinc- coated steel sheet. 6. Door: 0.0625 -inch- (1.59 -mm -) thick stainless -steel sheet. 7. Hinge: Continuous type. 8. Locks: Key - operated cylinder lock. 1.3 Execution MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Preparation: Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finished surfaces. Install concealed -frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Adjust and clean hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. D. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS 11 • 11 i SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. System Description: Provide aluminum storefront systems at new tenant space exterior walls capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. Failure includes air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits; and framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units. B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members. C. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to exterior from aluminum exposed to interior with a material of low thermal conductance. D. Wind Loads: Provide storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind - load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.42, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent. 1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Static- Pressure Test Performance: Provide storefront systems that do not evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind -load design pressures. b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile (1.609 km) of wind for relevant exposure category. E. Dead Loads: Provide storefront - system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimum 1/8 -inch (3.18 -mm) clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below. Provide a minimum 1/16 -inch (1.59 -mm) clearance between members and operable windows and doors. F. Air Infiltration: Provide storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm /sq. ft. (0.3 L /s /sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static - air - pressure difference of 1.57 lbf /sq. ft. (75.2 Pa). G. Water Penetration: Provide storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward- acting wind -load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not Less than 6.24 lbf /sq. ft. (299 Pa). H. Thermal Movements: Provide storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 e..: stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. I. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide storefront systems with average U- values of not more than 0.75 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.57 W /sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.1. J. Submittals: Product Data for each product specified and the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Show system layout and details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and contraction, and attachments to other work. 2. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 3. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency, indicate compliance of storefront systems with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current systems. K. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. L. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of storefront systems and are based on the specific systems indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." M. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code -- Aluminum." 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Kawneer Company, Inc. Trifab 451 -T, thermally- broken framing system or equal by US Aluminum. B. Materials: As follows: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. a. 'Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. d. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M). e. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10. ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2 I . SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1 2. Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold - rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot - rolled sheet and strip. 3. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 4. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure - glazing system of black, resilient glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. I 5. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 6. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 7. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSI'C -Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil (0.762 -mm) thickness per coat. 1 C. Components: As follows: 1. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. I. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. a. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads. I... U. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat -head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. I_ 3. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast -iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. I` 4. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer. D. Fabrication: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 1. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. 2. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 3. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture I 4. occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 5. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape I ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 6. Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated. Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. E. Aluminum Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 1. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 606.1 or AAMA 608.1. a. Color: Bronze to match adjacent existing storefront systems. F. Steel Priming: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer. Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel. Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1.3 Execution A. Installation, General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members. F. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated. G. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated. ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 - 4 • SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 H. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm). I. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces. END OF SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 08630 - METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 1.1 General A. Performance Requirements: As follows: 1. General: Provide metal- framed skylights capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movements indicated without failure. 2. Deflection Limits: As follows: a. Deflection of the entire length of framing members in direction normal to glazing plane is limited to 1/180 of clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. b. Deflection of the entire length of framing members for spans exceeding 20 feet (6 m) is limited to 1/240 of clear span. c. Deflection of framing members in a direction parallel to glazing plane, when carrying full dead load, is limited to an amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). 3. Lateral Support: Compression flanges of flexural members are laterally braced by cross members with minimum depths equal to 50 percent of flexural member depth and by anchors to the building structure. Glazing material does not provide lateral support. 4. Structural Loads: Provide metal - framed skylights, including anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of design loads indicated when supporting full dead loads. 5. Structural Performance: Provide metal- framed skylights, including anchorage, capable of withstanding test pressure indicated without material and deflection failures and permanent deformation of structural members exceeding 0.2 percent of span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures. b. Test Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile (1.609 km) of wind for relevant exposure category. 6. Thermal Movement: Provide metal - framed skylights that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, sealant failure, and other detrimental effects. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material surfaces. 7. Air Infiltration: Provide metal - framed skylights with maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm /sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of surface when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static- air - pressure differential of 6.24 lbf /sq. ft. (300 Pa). 8. Water Penetration: Provide metal - framed skylights that do not evidence water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential static pressure of 20 percent of positive design wind load, but not less than 6.24 lbf /sq. ft. (300 Pa). B. Submittals: As follows: METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 08630 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions and profiles of components, and finishes for metal- framed skylights. 2. Shop Drawings: For metal- framed skylights. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. a. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 3. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of units showing the full range of colors available for factory- finished aluminum. 4. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating skylights comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 5. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with sealants; include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results for sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 6. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with requirements. C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility who has specialized in installing metal - framed skylights similar to those indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for metal- framed skylights, including Shop Drawings, based on engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard skylights similar to those indicated for this Project. D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of skylights that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. F. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal - framed skylights and are based on the specific skylight systems indicated. Other manufacturers' skylight systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." G. Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 1. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. METAL- FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 08630 - 2 �l SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 H. Warranty: Provide a special project warranty signed by the Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer certifying that the installation will be free of defects in materials and workmanship and shall remain watertight for a period of 10 years from the date of final acceptance. Defects and leaks which develop during the warranty period, as well as damage to the structure and finishes resulting from such leakage, shall be repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dea- Moore, Inc.. 2. Evergreen House Skylights as represented by RGA Architectural Sales. 3. Super Sky Products, Inc. B. Framing Materials: As follows: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and finish indicated, and as follows: a. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). b. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). c. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M). 2. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard high - strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims to install and align skylights. 3. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing; compatible with adjacent materials. 4. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Aluminum sheet. 5. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories; compatible with adjacent materials. a. Movement Joints: Provide slip -joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended by manufacturer. b. Aluminum- Retaining -Cap Fasteners: ASTM A 193/A 193M, Series 300 stainless - steel screws; type as recommended by manufacturer. c. Connections to Supporting Structure: ASTM A 307, zinc - coated steel fasteners. 6. Framing- System Gaskets and Joint Fillers: Manufacturer's standard permanent gaskets and joint fillers for sliding, compression, and nonmoving joints. 7. Framing - System Sealants: Compatible with components with which sealants come in contact and recommended by skylight and sealant manufacturers for this use. 8. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC -Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, and formulated for 30 -mil (0.8 -mm) thickness per coat. 9. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." C. Glazing Materials: As follows: 1. Insulating Glass: 1" thick sealed insulating units consisting of outer layer min. 1/4" thick clear tempered float glass, and inner layer of 5/16" thick min. laminated safety glass METAL - FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 08630 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 with heat strengthened glass and light green PVB plastic inter layer. Unit shall have low -E coating on #2 surface. a. Outer layer: PPG Sungate 1000 T, or equal. b. Inner layer: Monsanto Saflex with #3773 light green interlayer, or equal. 2. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard pressure - glazing gaskets of elastomer type and hardness selected by skylight and gasket manufacturers to comply with requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3. Spacers, Edge Blocks, and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard permanent nonmigrating type of elastomer type and hardness selected to comply with requirements. a. For structural silicone glazing, provide bond - breaking spacer gaskets and bonding setting blocks compatible with silicone sealants. 4. Structural Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 1184, compatible with components with which sealant comes in contact, formulated and tested for use as a structural sealant, and neutral curing. a. Color: Black. b. Tensile Strength: 100 psi (690 kPa) minimum. c. Provide sealant with modulus of elasticity that will not allow movement of more than 25 percent of joint width, unless less movement is required by skylight systems' design. 5. Weatherseal Sealant: Neutral- curing silicone sealant recommended by skylight and sealant manufacturers for this use. a. Color: Black. D. Fabrication: Fit and assemble framing components to greatest extent practicable before finishing. Before shipping, shop assemble, mark, and disassemble components that cannot be permanently shop assembled. 1. Metal Protection: As follows: a. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. b. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. c. Where aluminum will contact pressure - treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by methods recommended by manufacturer. E. Aluminum Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA- M10C22A41, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker complying with AAMA 607.1. METAL- FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 08630 - 4 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1.3 Execution A. Metal Protection: As follows: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 3. Where aluminum will contact pressure - treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing skylight components. . 1. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 2. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 3. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. 4. Install framing components to drain water passing joints and to drain condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within skylight system to the exterior. 5. Coordinate installation of insulation and flashings at skylight perimeters to maintain continuity of thermal and water barriers. 6. Set continuous curbs and flashings in a full sealant bed, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." C. Erection Tolerances: Install skylight components true in plane, accurately aligned, and without warp or rack. Adjust framing to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line and at corners and where surfaces are separated by less than 3 inches (76 mm), limit offset from true alignment to less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); otherwise, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). D. Field Glazing: As follows: 1. Insulating Glass: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." E. Clean skylights inside and outside, immediately after installation and after sealants have cured, according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable coatings from prefinished metal surfaces. Remove labels and markings from all components. END OF SECTION 08630 METAL- FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 08630 - 5 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 08632 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS 1.1 General A. Performance Requirements: As follows: 1. General: Provide unit skylights capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movements indicated without failure. B. Submittals: As follows: 1. Product Data: Include manufacturer's data, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions and profiles of components, and finishes. C. Installer Qualifications: An installer experienced in installing unit skylights similar to those indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of unit skylights and are based on the specific skylight systems indicated. Other manufacturers' skylight systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." E. Warranty: minimum five -year warranty against material defects and leakage. 1.2 Products A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Skylights. 2. Bristolite 3. Thermo -Vu Sunlite Industries 4. Wasco Products, Inc. B. Materials: Polycarbonate- or acrylic- glazed, double -domed insulated unit skylights, with dome profile to generally match existing unit skylights and translucent white color to match existing unit skylights as follows: 1. Glazing to meet requirements of UBC Standard 26 -7 for type CC -1 or CC -2. Maximum SHGC (NFRC certified and labeled) of 1.0. Maximim U- Factor (NFRC certified and labeled; Standard RS-31) of 1.40. Dome rise to be at least 10 percent of maximum dimension. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and finish indicated, and as follows: a. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 b. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 c. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 3. Curb: Provide manufacturer's standard integral 12 inch tall, insulated aluminum curb. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims to install and align skylights. UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08632 -1 •TAY^�.J ^'Y �: "trim +.•f'C';��n n -•: c.«,K., -: n,:rnn,eM:....M..- �..,_.,,.« SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 4. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing; compatible with adjacent materials. 5. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Aluminum sheet. 6. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories; compatible with adjacent materials. a. Connections to Supporting Structure: ASTM A 307, zinc - coated steel fasteners. b. Concrete or Masonry Inserts: Zinc- coated cast -iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts; hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123. c. Structural Silicone Sealant Glazing: Prepare surfaces that will contact sealant and install sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Do not transport units until sealant has cured. C. Aluminum Finishes: Mill finish aluminum. 1.3 Execution A. Metal Protection: As follows: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by I painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. J 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by l painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 3. Where aluminum will contact pressure - treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing unit skylights. 1. Coordinate schedule and installation with the work of other Sections. 2. Coordinate installation of insulation and flashings at skylight perimeters to maintain continuity of thermal and water barriers. 3. Set continuous curbs and flashings in a full sealant bed, unless otherwise indicated. C. Erection Tolerances: Install unit skylights true in plane, accurately aligned, and without warp or rack. D. Clean skylights inside and outside, immediately after installation and after sealants have cured, according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable coatings from prefinished metal surfaces. Remove labels and markings from all components. END OF SECTION 08632 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08632 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 08711- DOOR HARDWARE 1.1 General A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each item specified, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, including wiring diagrams. 2. Samples: For each type of exposed finish. 3. Door Hardware Schedule: Organize into door hardware sets indicating type, style, function, size, label, hand, manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description of each electrified door hardware function, including sequence of operation. 4. Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks, coordinating with existing mall keying program. 5. Product Certificates: Certifying that door hardware complies with listed fire door assemblies. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier who is or employs a qualified DHI Architectural Hardware Consultant. C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference with owner's representative and mall security and maintenance supervisors at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule. D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail. E. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. 1.2 Products A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the Door Hardware Schedule. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturer's products. 2. Designations: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. B. Certified Products: Provide door hardware that is listed in one of BHMA's directories of certified products. C. Hinges and Pivots: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template - produced units. 1. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless -steel pin. b. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless -steel pin. c. Hinges for Fire -Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel, with stainless -steel pin. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging corridor doors with locks. 3. Threaded -to -the -Head Wood Screws: For fire -rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat -head screws; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors and frames and wood screws for wood doors. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. D. Locks and Latches: As follows: 1. Provide the lockset design designated below or, if sets are provided by another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated: a. Bored Locks: Sargent 10 line levers series 2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. 3. Lock Throw: Comply with labeled fire door requirements. 4. Backset: 2 -3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 5. Electromagnetic Locks: Provide the following, as tested according to BHMA A156.23: a. Strength Ranking: 500 lbf (6672 N). b, Inductive Kickback: Not more than 53 -V peak voltage. c. Residual Magnetism: Not more than 4 lbf (18 N) to separate door from magnet. E. Bolts: Comply with labeled fire door requirements. F. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. G. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. 1. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 2. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material, finish, and design to match locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors. H. Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Manufacturer: Sargent: no substitution. Match grade and style to coordinate with existing keying. 2. High- Security Grade: BHMA Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying with UL 437 (Suffix A). 3. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; interchangeable cores. 4. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. DOOR HARDWARE 08711- 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 I. Keying System: Factory- registered keying system; master key system. 1. Keys: Provide nickel - silver keys permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and "DO NOT DUPLICATE" notation. In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide three change keys and five master. J. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set. K. Coordinators: Provide coordinators for inactive leaves of pairs of doors, unless automatic or self - latching bolts are used. L. Closers: Comply with the following: 1. Flush Floor Plates: Finish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Match door hardware finish. 2. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide insert of floor finish material for floor closers, unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to accommodate thickness of floor finish. 3. Size of Units: Factory sized, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 4. Power - Assist Closers: As specified in Division 8 Section "Power Door Operators." M. Protective Trim Units: Furnish protection plates sized 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule. Fasten with exposed machine or self - tapping screws. N. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. O. Door Gasketing: Provide continuous weather -strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. P. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated; and listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems. Q. Fabrication: As follows: 1. Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials if different from specified standard. 2. Fasteners: Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for fire -rated applications. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." DOOR HARDWARE 08711- 3 ..._...«.•.... .♦..•......... x.. t.. n...::1'2rr.sJ`.,.,::i�e;:tl... SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1.3 Execution A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, . labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface - applied hardware according to SDI 107. C. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 -W series. D. Mounting Heights: Comply with DHI requirements for compliance with access code, unless otherwise indicated. E. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 1. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect. 2. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. G. Door Hardware Schedule: As follows: H. Legend of listed manufacturers: 1. HA Hager 2. SAR Sargent 3. RI Rixson 4. BBW Builders Brass Works 5. LCN LCN Closer 6. PE Pemko 7. KAW Kawneer 1. The items listed in the following "Schedule of Finish Hardware" shall conform throughout to the requirements of the foregoing specification. The third column of letters in the Hardware Schedule refers to the manufacturer abbreviation listed above. J. The Door and Frame Schedule sheet A9.0 indicates which Hardware Group is used with each door. DOOR HARDWARE 08711- 4 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION 1.4 Schedule of Finish Hardware HW -1 New Exterior Service Door 3'- 0 "x7' -0" 1 1h pr 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sign ....e.....,. �.;aY.'4aGK� 7: nbC•Udadit; Butts HA AB850 Lockset SAR 63- 10G37LL -26D Door Closer LCN 4041 -EDA Kick Plate BBW 37X Cylinder SAR 13 -3266 Threshold PE 271A Door Sweep PE 307A Weather Strip Gasket PE S88D "AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY" HW-2 New Interior Service Door 1 pr Butts 1 Latchset 1 Lockset 1 Door Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Cylinder 1 Wall Stop 1 Threshold 1 Set Smoke Gasket 1 Sign 3'- 0 "x7' -0" HA AB850 SAR 63- 10U15LL -26D (DR# 32 & 42 only) SAR 63- 10G37LL -26D (DR #35 only) LCN 4041 -EDA BBW 37X SAR 13 -3266 (DR #35 only) BBW W551X PE R.75FA (DR# 32 & 42 only) PE S88D "AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY" HW -3 Existing Entry Doors See Section 08920 for hardware HW -4 Existing Interior Service Door 3'- 0 "x7' -0" Adjust existing hardware 1 Set Smoke Gasket PE 1 Threshold PE S88D R.75FA HW -5 New Entry Doors 1 Cylinder SAR 13 -3266 See Section 08920 for balance of hardware HW -6 New Accessible Entry Doors 1 Cylinder SAR 13 -3266 See Section 08920 for balance of hardware DOOR HARDWARE MPI JOB NO. 98294 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 HW -7 New Restroom Door 3'- 0 "x7' -0" (on hold open) 1 1/2 pr Butts HA AB850 1 Latchset SAR 63- 10U15LL -26D 1 Door Closer LCN 4041 -EDA 1 Magnet Holdopen RI FM998 with 110V transformer power supply and 2 ceiling mounted smoke detectors w/ building system interlink 1 Kick Plate BBW 37X 1 Wall Stop BBW W551X 1 Set Smoke Gasket ' PE S88D HW -8 New Restroom Door 3'- 0 "x7-0" 1'/a pr Butts HA AB800 1 Privacy Lock SAR 63- 10U65LL -26D 1 Wall Stop BBW W9 HW -9 • New Interior Service Corridor Door PR 3'- 0 "x7' -0" 3 pr Butts HA AB850 2 Door Closer LCN 4041 -EDA 2 Pull Plate HA 31G -1G 3 "x12" Stainless Steel 2 Push Plate HA 31G 3 "x12" Stainless Steel 2 Overhead Stops RI 1 -26D 1 Threshold PE R.75FA 1 Sign "AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY" HW -10 New Interior Service Corridor Door PR 3'- 6 "x7' -0" (on hold open) 3 pr Butts HA AB850 2 Door Closer LCN 4041 -EDA 2 Exit Devices SAR 12 -8600 2 Strike plate SAR 605 2 Strike plate SAR 606 2 Door Pulls BBW 2954 x Type N Fasteners 1 Set Smoke Gasket PE S88D 2 Magnet Holdopen RI FM998 with 110V transformer power supply and 2 ceiling mounted smoke detectors with building system interlink HW-11 Existing Interior Restroom Door 3'- 0 "x7' -0" 1 Pull Plate HA 31G -1G 3 "x12" Stainless Steel 1 Push Plate HA 31G 3 "x12" Stainless Steel END OF SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 08711- 6 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING 1.1 General A. Performance Requirements: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 1. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Glass Thicknesses: Minimum thickness of 1" glass pane thickness in 1" insulating double - glazed assembly. Select glass thickness to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements. 1) Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. 2. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: As determined according to procedures indicated below: a. Center -of -Glass U- Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL -35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program, expressed as Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F (W /sq. m x K). b. Center -of -Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL- 35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer program. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. B. Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each glass product and glazing material, submit the following: 1. Samples: In the form of 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) square Samples for each type of glass, , and of 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 2. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. D. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. GLAZING 08800 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide." 2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM -3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines," and SIGMA TB- 3001, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." F. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 1.2 Products A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in schedules. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following manufacturers: Viracon, Pilkington -LOF, or PPG. C. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality q3; class as indicated in schedules. D. Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality q3; class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller - hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. E. Low - emissivity (Low -E) glass: Viracon VE -85 or equal by Monsanto, Pilkington -LOF, or PPG. Low -E coating to be on #2 surface of insulating glass units. F. Laminated Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other requirements specified, including those in the Laminated -Glass Schedule. 1. Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, clear and of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets, clear. b. Manufacturers: Monsanto, Interpane, Pilkington -LOF, PPG, or Viracon. G. Insulating -Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of dual - sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units. Provide units of overall one inch thickness; outer layer of Low -E glass and inner layer of clear float glass. H. Glazing Film at clerestory windows to be covered: Opaque, white, self- adhesive film; 3 -M or equal. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. GLAZING 08800 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION J• �4'a4 {1'L'dY, MPI JOB NO. 98294 Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. 1.3 Execution A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. C. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. D. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. E. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. F. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. G. Provide safety glass as indicated on drawings and as required by code and authorities having jurisdiction over the work. H. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING 08800 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 08920 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. System Description: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. Failure includes air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits and framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units. 1. Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members. 2. System is reglazable from the exterior. B. Wind Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind -load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent. 1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inches (19 mm), whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind -load design pressures. b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile (1.609 km) of wind for relevant exposure category. C. Seismic Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," Section 9, "Earthquake Loads," whichever are more stringent. D. Dead Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimum 1/8 -inch (3.18 -mm) clearance between members and top of fixed panels, glazing, or other fixed part immediately below. Provide a minimum 1/16 - inch (1.59 -mm) clearance between members and operable windows and doors. E. Live Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates supporting structure's deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation. F. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with permanent resistance to air leakage through system of not more than 0.06 cfm /sq. ft. (0.3 L /s /sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static - air - pressure difference of 6.24 lbf /sq. ft. (299 Pa). GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 G. Water Penetration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind -load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 10 lbf /sq. ft. (479 Pa). H. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates thermal movements of system and supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, noise or vibration, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. I. Structural Support Movement: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that accommodates structural movements including, but not limited to, sway, twist, column shortening, long -term creep, and deflection. J. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with an average U -value of not more than 0.75 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.75 W /sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.1. K. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including anchorage, that accommodates dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. L. Submittals: Product Data for each product specified and the following: 1. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of glazed aluminum curtain wall system including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, quantities, and locations. 2. Samples for initial selection showing the full range of colors available for components with factory - applied color finishes. 3. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of glazed aluminum curtain wall system with requirements based on comprehensive testing of manufacturer's current system. M. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing glazed aluminum curtain wall systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for glazed aluminum curtain wall systems, including drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. N. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of glazed aluminum curtain wall system from one source and by a single manufacturer. O. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of glazed aluminum curtain wall system and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 2 I I II I 11 11 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 P. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code -- Aluminum." 1. Engage welders who have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and who are currently certified for these processes. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Basis of bid is Kawneer Company, Inc. System 1600 -1; contractor may propose equal products by the following manufacturers for review and approval: 1. Butler Manufacturing Company; Vistawall Architectural Products. 2. International Aluminum Corporation; U.S. Aluminum. B. Materials: As follows: 1. Aluminum: As follows: a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 2. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), ASTM A 611, or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M). 3. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 4. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed- corner pressure - glazing system. 5. Sealants and joint fillers for joints within glazed aluminum curtain wall system as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 6. Bituminous Paint: SSPC -Paint 12, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 -mil (0.762 -mm) thickness per coat. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high - strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Finish exposed portions to match glazed aluminum curtain wall. 1. At movement joints, use slip -joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of material and type recommended by manufacturer. E. Anchors: 3 -way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer. G. Fabricate glazed aluminum curtain wall system according to Shop Drawings. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory - installed hardware before finishing components. Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. H. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight, true to detailed radii, and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. I. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. J. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. K. Glazing Pockets: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual." L. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. M. Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard 2- inch - thick glazed doors with minimum 3/16 -inch- thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie -rods. Provide manufacturer's standard snap -on extruded - aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. Kawneer Medium Stile #350 Heavy Wall Doors, with ten inch tall bottom rail, for 1 inch glazing units. N. Hardware: Provide heavy -duty hardware units indicated in sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for entrances indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish, unless otherwise indicated. At new entrance doors: 1. Kawneer heavy -duty pivots for center - glazed door leaves 2. Concealed overhead closer at each leaf (except door pairs equipped with power assist operator): Kawneer Husky 11 3. Lockset (on active leaf): Adams -Rite MS 1850A with cylinder guard and cam for Sargeant cylinder, and Exit Indicator 4. Strike reinforcement (at inactive leaf): Adams Rite 5. 2 -point locking system (at inactive leaf): Kawneer "Controller" or equal by Adams Rite 6. Push- pulls: Kawneer Architect's Classic Hardware tubular metal system with 9 inch center to center 90 degree offset pulls, style C09, and full width horizontal push bars, style CP -II. Clear anodized finish. 7. Threshold: as detailed, clear anodized aluminum 8. Full weatherstripping 9. Finger guards (at power assist operator door leaves only): Collapsible neoprene or PVC gasketing GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 4 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 10. Decal at head of each door pair: This Door to Remain Unlocked During Business Hours. At existing entrance doors: 1. Push - pulls: Kawneer Architect's Classic Hardware tubular metal system with 15 inch center to center 90 degree offset pulls, style CO15, and full width horizontal push bars, style CP -II. Anodized finish to match existing doors. O. Low Energy Power Assist Door Operator: Dor -O -Matic Senior Swing electromechanical operator system with microprocessor controls, conforming with ANSI/BHMA A156.19. No Substitutions. Provide with extruded aluminum transom housing and compatible system overhead concealed manual closer for adjacent inactive leaf of door pair. Operator to function in both Automatic Handicap Mode and Manual "Push -N -Go" Mode. Provide low - voltage recessed jamb- mounted pushbutton switch with dress plate #1211 -900 and recessed wall- mounted pushbutton switch with dress plate #1204 -900. Remainder of hardware as specified for door leaves elsewhere in this Section. P. Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products." Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. Q. Class I; Clear Anodic Finish: AA- M12C22A41, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker, and complying with AAMA 607.1. 1.3 Execution A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing glazed aluminum curtain wall system. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain water to the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. D. Install framing members plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions. F. Install column covers plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 5 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 G. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to building structure as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. Provide separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. H. Install sealant according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated. I. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain wall system to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m). 3. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm); where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 2 inches (50.8 mm), limit offset to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 4. Location: Limit variation from plane or location shown on Shop Drawings to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length. J. Provide Door Operator System manufacturer's standard one year limited warranty on equipment and controls, commencing on date of final acceptance. K. Provide final protection and maintain conditions; in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure glazed aluminum curtain wall system is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08920 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1.1 General A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where fire - resistance -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Angeles Metal Systems b. Clark Steel Framing, Inc. c. Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. Dale Industries, Inc. e. Dietrich Industries, Inc. f. Knorr Steel Framing Systems g. Marino/ Ware (formerly Marino Industries Corp.). h. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. i. Steeler, Inc. j. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia - Pacific Corp. c. James Hardie Industries d. National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. e. United States Gypsum Co. B. Steel Framing Components for Suspended and Furred Ceilings: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Cast -in -Place and Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capable of sustaining a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488. 2. Powder - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 3. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 4. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 - inch (4.1 -mm) diameter. 5. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust - inhibitive paint. 6. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust - inhibitive paint. 7. Channels: Cold- rolled steel, 0.0598 -inch (1.5 -mm) minimum thickness of base metal and 7/16 -inch- (11.1 -mm -) wide flanges, and as follows: a. Carrying Channels: 2 inches (50.8 mm) deep, 590 lb /1000 feet (88 kg /100 m), unless otherwise indicated. b. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep, 300 lb /1000 feet (45 kg /100 m), unless otherwise indicated. c. Finish: Rust - inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated. d. Finish: ASTM A 653, G 60 (ASTM A 653M, Z 180) hot -dip galvanized coating for framing for exterior soffits and where indicated. 8. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated and with 0.0179 -inch (0.45 -mm) minimum base metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating for framing for exterior soffits and ceiling suspension members in areas within 10 feet (3 m) of exterior walls. 9. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, 0.0179 -inch (0.45 -mm) minimum base metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating for framing for exterior soffits and ceiling suspension members in areas within 10 feet (3 m) of exterior walls. 10. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Standard product fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) to form 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm -) deep channel of the following configuration: a. Single- or Double -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric- shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single - slotted leg (web) or hat - shaped channel, with 1 -1/2 -inch- (38.1 -mm -) wide face connected to flanges by double - slotted or expanded -metal legs (webs). C. Steel Framing for Walls and Partitions: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot -dip galvanized coating for framing members attached to and within 10 feet (3 m) of exterior walls. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated and with 0.0179 -inch (0.45 - mm) minimum base metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide 0.0329 -inch (0.84 -mm) minimum base metal thickness for head runner, sill runner, jamb, and cripple studs at door and other openings. b. Provide 0.0329 -inch (0.84 -mm) minimum base metal thickness in locations to receive cementitious backer units. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 3. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, in depth indicated and with 0.0179 -inch (0.45 -mm) minimum base metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) to form 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm -) deep channel of the following configuration: a. Single- or Double -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric- shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single - slotted leg (web) or hat - shaped channel, with 1 -1/2 -inch- (38.1 -mm -) wide face connected to flanges by double - slotted or expanded -metal legs (webs). 5. Z- Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z- shaped furring members with slotted or nonslotted web, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M); with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), face flange of 1 -1/4 inch (31.8 mm), wall- attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), and of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. E. Gypsum Board Products: Types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end - to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. 1. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, in thickness indicated. a. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Type X where required for fire - resistance -rated assemblies. c. Type: Sag - resistant type for ceiling surfaces. d. Edges: Tapered. 2. Gypsum Board Base Layer(s) for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 36, in thickness indicated. a. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Type X where indicated or required for fire - resistance -rated assemblies. c. Type: Sag - resistant type for ceiling surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 931, with manufacturer's standard edges, in thickness indicated. a. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Type X where required for fire - resistance -rated assemblies and where indicated. 4. Water - Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, in thickness indicated. a. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Type X where required for fire - resistance -rated assemblies and where indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 5. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 79 with water- repellent paper and chemically - treated core for additional moisture resistance, of thickness indicated. a. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. b. Type: Type X, where required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies and where indicated. F. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047, formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement: 1. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip or electrolytic process, or steel sheet coated with aluminum, or rolled zinc. G. Accessories for Exterior Installations: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints formed from steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip process or rolled zinc complying with ASTM C 1047. H. Aluminum Accessories: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard extruded - aluminum accessories of profile indicated; Fry Reglet or approved equal: 1. Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 2. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA- C12C22A31. I. Joint Treatment Materials: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. 1. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. a. Use pressure - sensitive or staple - attached, open - weave, glass -fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. 2. Setting -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged, job - mixed, chemical - hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. a. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. b. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water - resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. c. For topping compound, use sandable formulation. 3. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory- packaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. a. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory -mixed product. (.1 1) Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. 2) Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 3) All- purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. C1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 4 r 1 r r t i 1.. 1 L 1.. 1 1 1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 J• Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. K. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic- rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. L. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. 1. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels. 2. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting -type joint compound recommended for spot - grouting hollow metal door frames. 3. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C 557. 4. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum panels to steel framing. 5. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications: a. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick. b. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. c. Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. 6. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 7. Steel drill screws of size and type recommended by unit manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units. 8. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514. 9. Asphalt - Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 10. Foam Gaskets: Closed -cell vinyl foam adhesive - backed strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit metal stud size indicated. 11. Sound - Attenuation Blankets: Unlaced mineral -fiber blanket insulation to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I. 12. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, thickness and maximum permeance rating as follows: a. 6 mils (0.15 mm), 0.13 perms (7.5 ng /Pa x s x sq. m). 13. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure - sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 1.3 Execution A. Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 1. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 5 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. a. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. b. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor. 3. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated. B. Installing Steel Framing for Suspended and Furred Ceilings: As follows: 1. Sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. 2. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard. 3. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter. wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross - furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. 4. For exterior soffits, install cross - bracing and additional framing to resist wind uplift according to details on Drawings. C. Installing Steel Framing for Walls and Partitions: Install steel studs and furring at spacings indicated. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or foam gaskets between studs and wall. 2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 3. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 4. For STC -rated and fire - resistance -rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor /roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor /roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 5. Frame door openings to comply with GA -219, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 7. Install polyethylene vapor retarder where indicated to comply with the following requirements: a. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with mechanical fasteners or adhesives. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose mineral -fiber insulation. b. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap joints; space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 6 I. 1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1 c. Seal joints in vapor retarders caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor retarder tape. d. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarder immediately before concealing it with the installation of gypsum board or other construction. D. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216. 1. Install sound - attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 2. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger I abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 3. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid -core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches (813 mm) wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. 4. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. 5. Isolate perimeter of nonload- bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm -) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 6. Where STC -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound - flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies. E 7. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 8. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. _ 9. Install water - resistant gypsum backing board panels behind ceramic tile, at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) open space where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 10. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: a. Fasten with screws. I- 11. Multi layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layers of gypsum panels and face layer to base layers as follows: i., a. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. I E. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered over supports. Install with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. Fasten with corrosion - resistant screws. F. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to Iaccessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. Install cornerbead at external corners. 2. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated. a. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. b. Install L -bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. c. Install U -bead where indicated. d. Install aluminum trim and other accessories where indicated. e. Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. G. Finishing Gypsum Board Assemblies: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint compound. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring tape. 3. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to flanges of trim accessories as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer. 4. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA -214. a. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies and sound - rated assemblies. b. Level 2 where panels form substrates for tile and where indicated. c. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces, in non - public "back -of- house" areas unless otherwise indicated. d. Level for gypsum board surfaces exposed to view in public areas. 5. Where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; and apply a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges and ready for decoration. 6. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. 7. Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound and apply first coat of joint compound. 8. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, embed tape in joint compound. 9. Finish exterior gypsum soffit board using setting -type joint compounds to prefill joints and embed tape, and for first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats, with the last coat being a sandable product. Smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to minimize need for sanding. Sand between coats and after finish coat. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 8 . k • r r r e SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 a. Painting exterior gypsum soffit board after finish coat has dried is specified in another Division 9 Section. 10. Finish water - resistant gypsum backing board to comply with ASTM C 840 and gypsum board manufacturer's directions. END OF SECTION 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 09270 - GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. This section specifies Glass fiber Reinforced Gypsum (GFRG) fabrications, including their design, support structures, and related services for erection and installation. B. Work included: 1. Provide all materials, equipment, labor and additional services required for the fabrication and delivery of GFRG shapes and support frames. 2. All materials, equipment, labor and additional services required for the installation and finishing of GFRG units shall be provided by the installer as shown in the contract documents and in conformance with the Manufacturer's installation procedures, which include the following: a. Structural framing, hanger systems and fastening asrequired. b. Joint finishing, fastener concealment and patching. C. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Gypsum board assemblies: Section 09255. 2. Painting: Section 09900. 3. Electrical systems connected to or impacting GFRG units: Section 16000 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Sections: 1. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering type. Indicate seams and termination points. Submit complete shop drawings fully detailing fabrication and installation of GFRG fabrications, including unit shapes (elevations and sections) and thickness of GFRG, finishes, joint and connection details, steel support framing system (where used), other items integrated in fabrications, sequence of erection for special conditions and relationships to adjacent materials. 2. Submit samples of each shape to be provided, at full scale, for review and acceptance. Samples of linear pieces may be full length or foreshortened at manufacturer's option, with minimum length of 3' -0 ". Provide samples of each corner piece and end condition. Samples, when approved, may be incorporated into the work. 3. Directions describing joint treatment, patching, adhesives, fasteners and fastener concealment procedures. 4. Backup test data on which GFRG design is based and data on GFRG tests. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design responsibility: 1. Design individual pieces to conform to the requirements of the Documents. All proposed changes shall be noted and submitted with shop drawings. GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09270 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Substitutions: a. Proposals shall be based only the specified product. b. Alternate products must be submitted with product data and samples for review by architect. B. Mock -Ups: 1. Submit one full -scale unit meeting design requirements prior to start of production and after acceptance of shop drawings, samples and related documents. a. Architect shall approve mock -up before production of GFRG is started. b. Retain mock -up on job site as standard of quality for GFRG units. c. Incorporate mock -up into the job in location approved by Architect. d. Provide one complete light fixture shroud assembly. e. Provide one multi-unit run of at least three pieces of double - bullnose fascia assembly incorporating one inner corner and one outer corner unit with a minimum of three joints. C. Manufacturer's qualifications: Manufacturer with a demonstrated capability to produce GFRG products of quality and scope required for the project and actively involved in GFRG production for at least five years. Manufacturer must have sufficient production capacity to produce, transport and deliver required units without causing delay in the work. D. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed 5 projects similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and handling: 1. All units are to be handled, supported and transported in conformance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Lift and support units only at points indicated for attachment on shop drawings. 3. Use non - staining shock absorbing material between units and for support during shipment. 4. Protect units from dirt and moisture during handling and shipment. B. Acceptance at site: 1. Installer shall be responsible for inspecting and accepting all units upon delivery. Any discrepancies of quantity or material condition will be brought to the attention of the manufacturer immediately. C. Jobsite storage: 1. Store units in an upright position on a firm, smooth and level surface. 2. Installer will protect pieces from dirt, moisture, surface damage and other jobsite hazards. 3. Use non - staining shock absorbing material between units and for support during storage. 4. Place stored units so that identification marks are easily accessible. GLASS - FIBER- REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09270 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. DecoForm Corporation, as represented by Continental Architectural Products, attention Len Nowacki Cleveland, Ohio Phone: (440) 230 -1297 B. Olympian Precast, Inc., attention Patrick Purcell 19150 Union Hill Road Redmond, Washington 98053 -0539 Phone: (425) 868 -1922 Fax: (425) 868 -1400 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glass fiber Reinforced Gypsum members to consist of long strand or chopped strand Glass fiber mat, laminated with high strength, high density alpha -based gypsum produced in a manufacturing plant and shipped to a jobsite as pre - molded shapes for field erection. B. C. D. E. Provide nominal Glass fiber content of not less than six percent by weight. Units to be dimensionally stable and fabricated to shape, size and thickness indicated on shop drawings. Materials embedded or integrated into GFRG units shall have a Class 1 Flame Spread Rating. Material characteristics: GFRG members to meet or exceed the following standard: 1. Shell thickness 3/16" nominal 2. Flexural strength 4,400 PSI 3. Tensile strength 1,200 to 1,400 PSI 4. Finished density 115 lbs. per cubic ft. 5. Impact strength (Charpy) 6. Burning characteristics 7. Smoke development 8. Impact Strength 9. Rockwell Hardness 2.3 ACCESSORIES 11 ft. lbs. per sq. inch; 7. 0 flame spread 0 8.0 to 8.8 ft.lb. /sq. In. M72 A. Miscellaneous materials to be supplied by installer: 1. Metal internal framing and separate metal support frame sections as required for support of units as indicated on shop drawings. 2. Shims as required to provide proper alignment of units. 3. Flange adhesive to be (Liquidnail or equal) as recommended by the manufacturer for maximum joint strength. 4. Fasteners to be as designated on shop drawings. 5. Hanger wire to be galvanized steel wire, required size to be as designated on shop drawings. 6. Joint primer as recommended by the manufacturer to insure proper adhesion of gypsum - based finish materials. GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09270 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 7. Joint taping and topping materials shall be as specified in Gypsum Wall Board section. For maximum joint strength, a fast set type compound (Durabond or equal) is recommended for initial coats along with perforated paper tape. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Molds: 1. To be constructed from materials of rigidity sufficient to ensure finished products that conform to profiles, dimensions and tolerances indicated on shop drawings. 2. Use mold release agents that are compatible with architectural finish and joint sealants. B. Lamination: 1. Mix gypsum materials as required for desired mix proportion. 2. Spray mist coat of gypsum cement into shape of mold. 3. Alternate layers of glass mat and gypsum into mold, place additional layers onto flanges for added strength. C. Curing: 1. Employ curing methods that will provide sufficient strength before removing units. 2. After demolding, unit shall be handled and stored under appropriate conditions of temperature and moisture to insure part stability. D. Identification: 1. Each unit to be marked on unexposed surface with identification mark that matches corresponding mark on shop drawings and part schedule. E. Shop Finishing: 1. Finish exposed face of fabrications to match accepted samples. 2. Any hollows, voids, scratches or other surface imperfections to be repaired and surface of unit shall be ready for primer. F. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Dimensional - length and width plus or minus 1/8" 2. Skin thickness plus 1/8" minus 0" 3. Warpage or bowing 1/360 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION /INSPECTION A. Coordinate with the providers of adjoining work for scheduling of this work. B. Inspect jobsite conditions for clearance and working space provided before commencement of installation. Verify that jobsite dimensions are in agreement with approved shop drawings. GLASS- FIBER - REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09270 - 4 I 1 11 11 1. C. Installation requirements: 1. E. 1_ . tolerances not listed , comply with requirements of PCI -MNL -117. SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION C. Verify that all pieces adhere to shop drawings prior to installation. MPI JOB NO. 98294 D. Inspect surfaces to which GFRG units will be attached for suitability of attachment and support of GFRG. Bring discrepancies affecting the installation of GFRG members to the attention of the Contractor and resolve before installation begins. Commencement of work signals acceptance of jobsite conditions as acceptable for installation of this work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Lifting and setting: 1. Lift GFRG units at oints established by manufacturer. P Y 2. Set GFRG units level, plumb and square within allowable tolerances. B. Supports and bracing: 1. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and alignment as units are being permanently connected. 1. Parts will be installed as shown in approved shop drawings. Curved parts forming a segment of a circle to be installed at a constant radius. 2. Joints will be properly aligned and spaced as required to prevent overall dimensional error. Control joints shall be used on runs exceeding 30 feet or as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Construction adhesive shall be used at flanges to resist independent part movement and cracking at joints. 4. Shim as required to ensure proper alignment with adjacent units and other trade's materials. 5. All pieces will be securely anchored with screws, bolts, wires or metal clips as shown in approved shop drawings. Type, size and spacing of anchorage devices to be as required to meet required loads and building codes. 6. Countersink, fill and float drywall screws where shown in installation drawings. 7. Joints between units and at intersection with drywall shall be taped and finished to match surface texture. 8. Joint treatments shall maintain the profile of curved parts and care shall be taken to prevent crowning of taping materials between units. 9. Topping coats shall be sanded smooth. Patch surface defects, clean and prepare surface for scheduled finish. Finish standard shall be per Level 5 description of "Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" endorsed by AWCI, CISCA, Gypsum Association, and painting and Deocrating Contractors of America. C. Installation tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances for locating PGRG units. For erection 1. Face width of joint as follows: a. Panel dimension 10 feet or less, plus or minus 3/16 inch. b. Panel dimension 10 feet to 20 feet, plus or minus 1/4 inch. c. Panel dimension over 20 feet, plus 1/4 inch, minus 5/16 inch. GLASS - FIBER- REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09270 - 5 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Warpage: Maximum permissible warpage of one corner out of plane with other three is 1/16 inch per foot distance from nearest corner or 1/4 inch total after installation. 3. Bowing: Not over L/360, with a maximum of 1 inch where "L" is panel length in inches in direction of bow. Differential bowing, between adjacent members of same design, not more than 1/4 inch. 3.3 REPAIR /RESTORATION A. Repair: 1. Patch or replace defective pieces subject to approval by the Architect. 2. Patching will be utilized when structural integrity and appearance of unit are not compromised. 3. Protect GFRG units from damage by subsequent work during construction and until accepted by the Contractor. 3.4 WARRANTY A. General: 1. Warranty that GFRG materials and assemblies and their supports will not warp or sag and shall remain free from cracks, chips and marks caused by defective material or workmanship for the period of one year from the date of acceptance. END OF SECTION 09270 GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 09511- ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Submittals: In addition to Product Data for each type of acoustical panel and suspension system required, submit the following: 1. 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Set of 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire- response tests were performed by UL, ITS /Warnock Hersey, or another independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow -up services. 2. Surface - burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. 3. Fire - resistance -rated assemblies, which are indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory," from ITS/ Warnock Hersey's "Directory of Listed Products," or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency, are identical in materials and construction to those tested per ASTM E 119. 4. Products are identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. C. Extra Stock: Five unopened cartons of each tile type, size, color with Owner's maintenance crew. 1.2 Products A. Acoustical Panels: USG Eclipse Premier, 2' x 2' x 1" thick, SLT "Shadlowline tapered ", color: white (no substitutions). B. Metal Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard direct -hung heavy -duty rated suspension system complying with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements Donn DX26, or Chicago metallic equal. C. Finishes and Colors for Metal Suspension System, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory- applied finish for type of system indicated. Color: white. D. Suspension System Attachment Devices: Fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials and sized for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Provide Unistrut -type members as necessary to "trapeze" span around or between existing structural members and to avoid obstructions. E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc- coated, carbon -steel wire complying with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. Size wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch- (2.69 -mm -) diameter wire. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 F. Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. G. Compression struts: Grid manufacturer's standard product for span, spacing and loads imposed. 1.3 Execution A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 2. U.B.C.'s "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings ": U.B.C. Standard 25 -2. 3. Provide new ceiling grid and tile systems complete where shown. 4. Existing ceilings where indicated: Replace tiles. Coordinate with contractors for work of other sections for scheduled preparation and painting of existing grids to be used. B. Secure ceiling hangers from suspension system members to building's structural members. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with other objects within ceiling plenum. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms, or floor or roof deck. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 2. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. 3. Provide seismic restraint diagonal wire assemblies with compression struts at maximum 12' -0" OC each way. 4. Provide 2 slack wires for in- ceiling light fixtures and mechanical fixtures and equipment as required by referenced standards. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit matching edge profile of tile design. Touch -up paint all cut edges exposed to view. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511- 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 09900 - PAINTING 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Submittals: For each paint system specified, provide the following: 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross - reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. E. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing color match existing or as specified in the finish schedule Sheet A9.0 for each type of finish -coat material indicated. F. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 2. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 -by -8 -inch (100 -by- 200 -mm) samples of natural- or stained -wood finish on actual wood surfaces. G. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. H. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. I. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well - ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers in clean condition, free of PAINTING 09900 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 J• foreign materials and residue. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Project Conditions: Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.2 Products A. Special coating - Plomyx Multi -Color Finish: 1. Polomyx modified acrylate copolymer multi -color coating. Finish shall be ready- mixed, with no field mixing or tinting required. Allow substrate primers to cure 72 hrs prior to applying finish. At exterior conditions apply a Urethane over coat with UV inhibitor. B. Stain finish as per scheduled C. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best - quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint- material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. E. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. 1.3 Execution A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. C. Preparation: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface - applied protection before surface preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. E. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition. 1. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been PAINTING 09900 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Touch up bare areas and shop - applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. F. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. G. Application: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. PAINTING 09900 - 3 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built -in items are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 7. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. K. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. L. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. N. Field Quality Control: The Owner reserves the right to engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 1. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests as required by the Owner. PAINTING 09900 - 4 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. If tests show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. O. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint - spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. P. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. Q. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. R. Paint Schedules: See finish schedule Sheet A9.0. S. Exterior Paint Systems 1. P -1, Stucco a. Acrylic latex finish to match existing: One coat primer, 1 finish coat 1) Preservative Prime -1 Masonry Primer / sealer base 2) Preservative 62 Series color shield 2500 Exterior - Acrylic 2. Zinc - Coated Metal: a. Semi - gloss, Acrylic - Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized primer. 1) Primer: Total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. Preservative 24 -99 Series Eco -Prime. 2) First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic -latex enamel, total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. Preservative 24 Series Eco- Thane.E. metal 3. P -2, Special coating - Plomyx Multi -Color Finish: Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturers instructions. One Basecoat, three finish coats. PAINTING a. Basecoat: Apply as many coats as necessary to produce a uniform substrate appearance. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. Allow to dry prior to application of subsequent coats. b. Sand: sand basecoat with 100 grit or finer sandpaper. Remove dust. c. Multicolor Finish: Apply in two steps 09900 - 5 .., ^:a.x.rrasrr.rcr a SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1) First Step: Apply high - pressure spray coat to completely cover basecoat and achieve a continuous uniform film. Comply with manufacturer's cover rate. 2) Second Step: Apply low pressure spray coat adjusted to produce uniform pattern and texture matching approved sample. Slight variations in pattern and color blend are normal for multicolor coatings. 3) Third Step: Apply Urethane over coat with UV inhibitor T. Interior Paint Systems 1. P -1, Gypsum Board a. New Gypsum Board - Match existing finish with Latex based: One primer coat, one finish coat. 1) Primer: Preservative 95 -100 Pre -Cote primer /sealer. 2) Finish: Preservative 69 or 67 series Styro -Cote. b. Existing Gypsum Board - Match existing finish with Latex based: One finish coat. 1) Finish: Preservative 69 or 67 series Styro -Cote. 2. P -2, Special coating - Plomyx Multi -Color Finish: Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturers instructions. One Basecoat, two finish coats. a. Basecoat: Apply as many coats as necessary to produce a uniform substrate appearance. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. Allow to dry prior to application of subsequent coats. b. Sand: sand basecoat with 100 grit or finer sandpaper. Remove dust. c. Multicolor Finish: Apply in two steps 1) First Step: Apply high- pressure spray coat to completely cover basecoat and achieve a continuous uniform film. Comply with manufacturer's cover rate. 2) Second Step: Apply low pressure spray coat adjusted to produce uniform pattern and texture matching approved sample. Slight variations in pattern and color blend are normal for multicolor coatings. 2. S-1, Transparent Over Wood Doors: a. Pre -seal: Sherwood Vinyl Sealer #T67F3, reduced 20 % -50% (depending on stain color) with lacquer thinner. b. Stain coat: Sherwood Wiping Stain, S64 Series. c. Sealer: Sherwood 24% solids Vinyl Sealer #T67F3. d. Finish coat: Sherwood Precatalyzed Lacquer #T99FX212 F. Metals: PAINTING 09900 - 6 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 1. P -1, Satin Paint Over Primed (Includes H.M. doors, frames, reifies): Two finish coats Preservative Acrylic 25 series "Envira- Shield" satin finish over factory primer. 2. P -1, Satin Paint Over Unprimed: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Preservative 94-54 Acrylic "Corro- Prime" b. Finish: Two coats Preservative Acrylic 25 series " Envira- Shield" satin finish. END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.1 General A. Submittals: Include the following: 1.2 1. Product Data: For each type of toilet compartment and screen specified. 2. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. 3. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of sections of actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of compartment or screen indicated. Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Global Steel Products Corp. 3. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 4. Sanymetal. 5. Metpar. B. Men's Toilet Room: stainless steel, maximum privacy, overhead -rail- braced units with 4 inches maximum clearance to floor. C. Women's Toilet Room: Plastic - laminate faced, overhead -rail- braced units. D. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, that is leveled to stretcher - leveled flatness, in Number 4 finish and standard thicknesses. E. Core Material for Metal -Faced Units: Manufacturer's standard sound - deadening honeycomb of resin - impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters. F. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, GP -50, 0.050 -inch (1.27 -mm) nominal thickness, in color and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. G. Core Material for Plastic Laminate: ANSI 208.1, Type M -2 particleboard with 45 -1b (20.4 -kg) density in thicknesses required to provide nominal thicknesses of 1 inch (25 mm) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters. H. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware. I. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U- brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of chrome - plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear- anodized aluminum. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 J• Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy -duty operating hardware and accessories of chrome - plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear - anodized aluminum. K. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded - aluminum head rail with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish. L. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome- plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft- resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized or other rust - resistant, protective- coated steel. M. Fabrication: As follows: 1. Except as otherwise detailed, provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment- mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment- mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 2. Overhead - Braced - and - Floor- Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. 3. Doors: 4' -10" tall doors; unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch- (610 -mm -) wide in- swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch- (914 -mm -) wide out - swinging doors with a minimum 32 -inch- (813 -mm -) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. a. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self - closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. b. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface - mounted latch unit with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. c. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment- mounted accessories. d. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumpers at out - swinging doors or entrance screen doors. e. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out - swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 1.3 Execution A. Prior to toilet room demolition work, field measure existing installation to detern =mine existing layout and locate existing backing, blocking, and points of connection which may be re -used if determined by this contractor to be sufficient support for new units. Coordinate with the work of other Sections for location and type of additional blocking or backing required to be installed in existing or new walls. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 B. Installation: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. C. Overhead- Braced - and - Floor - Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. D. Wall -Hung Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. E. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out - swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS 1.1 General MPI JOB NO. 98294 A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf /sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward or outward. 2. Thermal Movements: Movements resulting from 120 deg F (67 deg C) change (range) in ambient and 180 deg F (100 deg C) change in surface temperatures. B. Submittals: In addition to Product Data, submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories not completely described in Product Data. 2. Samples of each type of metal finish. 3. Product test reports indicating compliance of products with requirements. C. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Airolite Co. 2. Construction Specialties, Inc. 3. Ruskin Manufacturing; Tomkins Industries, Inc. B. Materials: As follows: 1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063 -T5 or T -52. 2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming. 3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M,0G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 4. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304. 5. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 6. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt mastic complying with SSPC -Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers, or asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. C. Fabrication, General: Fabricate louvers to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 -1 sty::rr:.�gq'iY7;Htit*rt :!.+p •^.17::',91,4 +K� +t SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 2. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer. D. Fixed, Extruded- Aluminum, Horizontal Louvers: Provide louvers with extruded- aluminum frames and blades. 1. Performance Requirements: Either drainable- or nondrainable -blade type with maximum standard airflow not less than 7500 cfm (3540 L /s) with not more than 0.18 - inch wg (45 -Pa) static- pressure loss. 2. Descriptive Requirements: As follows: a. Exterior Blade Profile: Drainable blade; Ruskin ELF8WDD or equal. b. Interior Blade Profile: Chevron shape, "sight- tight ": CSI #4180 E. Louver Screens: Provide insect screens on interior faces of exterior louvers. 1. Frames and Louver Screening: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louvers to which screens are attached. F. Finishes, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish louvers after assembly. Interior - factory prime coat. Exterior - factory finish Kynar 500 - white. 1.3 Execution A. Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E, Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. END OF SECTION 10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 2 r SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 SECTION 10801- TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.1 General A. Submittals: Manufacturer's Product Data. Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet Accessory Schedule on the Drawings. 1. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.2 Products A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of the following: 1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., no substitutions. 2. Warm -Air Dryers: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., no substitutions. 3. Infant -Care Products: a. Avanti Baby Consultants, Inc., no substitutions; 1-800/366-9778. B. Materials: As follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312 -inch (0.8- mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings. 3. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359 -inch (0.9- mm) minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. 4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180). 5. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal. 6. Baked - Enamel Finish: Factory- applied, gloss- white, baked - acrylic- enamel coating. 7. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD- M-411. 8. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -1 ..«....v. ..+,•.w.s.vr. »ur M:+ u+ �. + udldCtaCSAtt .V:f+'ta�"^S'h:Y.!:�:Sk ?r„,ry. t�(rsM4Kb�!Y:tl�ux�xr�nn SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION MPI JOB NO. 98294 9. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 10. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Coordinate keying requirements with Owner for compatibility with existing accessory keying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 1.3 Execution A. Coordinate with other trades regarding coordination of requirements for installation of this work, including layout of support structures, heights, and dimensions. Provide templates or installation requirement drawings as requested. B. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper - resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. 2. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. C. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. D. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. E. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801°- 2 1 ij i 0 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 15000 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto and Division 1 - General Requirements for all work in Divisions 15. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Design Intent 1. Replacement and modification of Sears and Main entrance door heating systems to accommodate architectural revisions. 2. Relocation of exhaust ductwork and roof penetration above JC Penney corridor. 3. Removal and relocation of existing plumbing piping and accessories at renovated main entrance and restrooms. 4. Relocation and replacement of fire sprinkler piping and heads at new skylights. Relocation of water motor alarm at main entrance rearrangement of sprinkler heads at renovated restrooms. B. Systems Provide labor, materials and appliances and perform operations in connection with satisfactory installation of mechanical work ready to operate in strict accordance with these specifications and drawings. Work of Division 15 includes, but is not limited to, that as delineated in the following specification sections: 15000 General Provisions 15055 Basic Materials and Methods 15300 Fire Protection System 15400 Plumbing Systems 15488 Natural Gas System 15810 HVAC Equipment 15840 Air Distribution Systems 15000 -1 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS Conform to following code and agency requirements having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation. • Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with local amendments. • Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC) with local amendments. • Uniform Building Code (UBC) with local amendments. • National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. • Requirements of OSHA and EPA. • National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes and Standards. • American Gas Association (AGA) Standards. Li • ASTM, ANSI and NEMA standards, as referenced in subsequent sections. • Local Sewer District Requirements. • Local Water District Requirements. [ • Local Health Department Requirements. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Visit site and become familiar with existing conditions affecting work. B. Verify locations of any overhead or buried utilities on or near site. ` f Determine such locations in conjunction with all public and private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. j C. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic. Verify all measurements, dimensions and connections on the site, and coordinate between trades to preclude interferences. D. When discrepancies occur between plans and specifications, the Architect will determine which takes precedence and the Contractor shall perform the selected requirement at no additional cost. E. Check mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications to assure proper location and electrical characteristics of connections serving mechanical and electrical equipment. F. Advise the Architect of any modifications required to suit equipment furnished. 1- G. Locate all piping to avoid conflict and interference with the ductwork and lighting fixtures that may be installed after the plumbing and piping. In general, give ductwork preference over piping, unless directed otherwise by the Architect. ,ff 1.05 EXISTING SYSTEMS Existing systems and utility lines indicated on drawings are in accordance with I3 information furnished to the Architect and may not be complete. Contractor is responsible for locating, uncovering, disposing of or maintaining existing systems. 11 15000 -2 1.06 FINAL APPROVAL A. Contingent upon completion of the following: • Execution of Architect's final observation report • Operation and maintenance manuals • Operation instruction period • Permit submittals • Record drawings • Valve list posted • Balancing • Testing and cleaning B. The Contractor shall submit a completed Project Completion Form at the time final acceptance of the mechanical work is requested. A copy of the form to be used is attached to this section. 1.07 TERMS OF CONTRACT A. Submittals: 1. Submit for review six (6) copies of shop drawings, brochures (catalog data), and lists in accord with Division 1. Turn in all Division 15 submittals as a single unit. Only Fire Protection (Section 15300) may be submitted separately. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, material and equipment to be submitted include all items specified in Part 2 (Products) in each section of Division 15 and as listed on equipment schedules on drawings. 3. Clearly indicate on each page the equipment schedule designation, as applicable, and model intended for use. 4. Do no fabrication or manufacture of products until return of submittals. 5. Provide shop drawings for all products, systems, system components, and special supports which are not a standard catalog product and which may be fabricated for the Contractor or by the Contractor. Layout drawings to scale and show dimensions where accuracy of location is necessary for coordination or communication purposes. B. Substitutions: 1. Manufacturers and models of equipment and material indicated herein and on drawings are those upon which mechanical design is based. Other manufacturers with products considered equal in general quality may be listed without specific model designation. 2. For substitution of any other manufacturers' equipment, see Division 1. In selecting substitute equipment, Contractor is responsible for and must guarantee equal performance and fit. 15000 -3 3. Unless indicated otherwise, "or approved" may be assumed for all products in Division 15. DOCUMENTATION 1 A. Permits: Submitted, paid for and obtained by Contractor. Submit copies of signed, approved permits to the Architect upon request. (`1s _1 B. Record Drawings: See Division 1. Show location of equipment and size of piping and ductwork. Locate all valves, cocks, dampers and similar equipment with tag or label identification. Indicate locations and elevations of exterior pipe and utility connections. Maintain continuously updated drawings during progress of project. 1.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Contents: Furnish, in accord with Division 1, three (3) bound copies of operating and maintenance manuals to include the following: • Manufacturers, suppliers, contractor and mechanical subcontractors' r names, addresses and phone numbers. 4 • Warranty service contractors' names, address and phone numbers (if different from above). • Schedule and description of routine maintenance for each component to include oiling, lubrication and greasing data and belt sizes, types and lengths. • Balancing log and test data. • Manufacturer's cuts and rating tables, including brochures for all 1 submittal items. • Part numbers of all replaceable items. • Written guarantees. • Record drawings corrected and completed. B. Binders: 1. Furnish typewritten or printed index and tabbed dividers between principal categories. 2. Bind each manual in a hard - backed loose -leaf binder. 3. Imprint on cover: 1 • Name of project. • Owner. I. • Location of project. • Architect. • Contractor. ( • Year of completion. L_ 4. Imprint on backing: • Name of project. • Year of completion. 15000 -4 Ei C. Submittals: 1. Preliminary Copies: Prior to scheduled completion of the project, submit two copies for review by the Architect. 2. Final Copies: After approval of the preliminary copies, submit three (3) finished copies to the Owner. 1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. General: In addition to requirements of Division 1, following initial operation of mechanical systems and prior to acceptance by the Architect, perform the following services. 1. At least two weeks prior to each instruction period, give written notification of readiness to proceed to the Architect and Owner, and obtain mutually acceptable dates. 2. Conduct demonstrations and instructions for the Owner's representatives, pointing out requirements for servicing and maintaining equipment and systems. 3. ' If requested by the Architect, furnish qualifications of Contractor's personnel in charge of the instruction; foreman position is minimum acceptable. 4. Include preliminary discussion, information from maintenance manual and contract drawings; conduct tours of the new construction, explaining maintenance, operation and adjustment of each piece of equipment. B. Minimum duration of instruction periods: 1. Plumbing 2 hours 2. Fire Protection Systems 2 hours 3. Air Handling Systems 2 hours 1.11 ELECTRICAL A. Motors: 1. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degree C environment with maximum 50 degree C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load. 2. Starting Capability: Not less than 12 starts per hour. 3. Phase Characteristics: Squirrel -cage induction poly -phase motors for 3/4 HP and larger, and capacitor -start single -phase motors for 1/2 HP and smaller. At equipment manufacturer's option, 1/6 HP and smaller may be split -phase type. 15000 -5 ..w..n..t'.�..1. 4. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single -phase motors. 5. Enclosure Type: Open drip -proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation, and guarded drip -proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants. Weather - protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II, where not housed. 6. Overload Protection: Built -in thermal overload protection. 7. Name Plate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. B. Motor Starters: By mechanical equipment manufacturer where factory mounted controls are provided. All other starters provided by Contractor in accord with Division 16. C. Power Wiring: In accord with Division 16. 1.12 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING AND PATCHING A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work by other trades where necessary for installation of mechanical work. Perform work only with craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves, frames, etc., and by coordinating for openings in advance. Assist other trades in securing correct location and placement of rough- frames, sleeves, openings, etc. for ducts and piping. C. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work. Perform cutting in manner so as not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes required to be cut in floors without breaking out around holes. 1.13 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide functional test of Heating Systems, and all mechanical components. Written verification of test to be signed by Owner's Representative. B. Testing and balancing of mechanical systems shall be performed as described in following sections and as required by the various codes and ordinances. C. Do not allow any work to be covered up or enclosed until inspected, tested and approved by the Architect and all authorities having jurisdiction over the work. D. Should any work be enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test, Contractor shall at his own expense uncover work, and after it has been inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs as necessary to restore all work distributed by him to its original condition. 15000 -6 ii r f 1.14 SALVAGE Remove excess piping and sheet metal work and plug or cap any unused branch connections. Remove scrap pipe and sheet metal and all other excess materials from the site. 1.15 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. All work, material and equipment shall be free of defect, complete and in perfect operating order at time of delivery to Owner. B. Without cost to Owner, correct all defects and failures discovered within one year from date of final acceptance, except when in the opinion of the Architect such condition is due to neglect or carelessness of the Owner. C. The guarantee of the Contractor is independent of shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment he has furnished. Submit with Operation and Maintenance Manual all guarantees which exceed one year. D. Make all necessary adjustments during first year of operation. E. The presence of any inspector or observer during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work. 1.16 PROJECT CLOSE -OUT At end of project, Contractor shall verify that the following have been accomplished: • -Test and Balance Reports submitted. • - Operation and Maintenance Manuals submitted. • - Record Drawings submitted. • - Operating Instructions completed. END OF SECTION SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION SECTION 15055 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Conform to General and Supplementary Conditions, the modifications thereto, and Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.02 SCOPE This section includes products, assemblies and methods applicable to more than one of the systems specified in the following sections of Division 15. 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Use products of a single manufacturer, where two or more units of same class of equipment are required. Use new equipment and materials. B. Protect materials stored on site against weather, corrosion and dirt. C. Provide major components of equipment with manufacturer's name, address, catalog number and capacity indicated on a nameplate, securely affixed in a conspicuous place. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Bell and Spigot: ASTM A -74 No -Hub: CISPI 301 B. Steel Pipe, Black and Galvanized: ASTM A -120 Fittings: Malleable iron screwed: ANSI B16.3 Cast iron screwed: ANSI B16.4 C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B -88 Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22 15055 -1 D. Copper DWV: ASTM B306 .. Fittings: Cast brass, B16.23 2.02 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES Operating Valves: Nibco, Crane, Stockham, Hammond or Milwaukee /. equal to Nibco model numbers listed: Gate: T -111 Globe: T -211 Check.: T -413 1 Ball: T -580 -Y 2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Unions: Ground joint, malleable type. Grinnell, Crane, Walworth, Syspac. B. Access Panels: Same type and construction as those specified in Section 08300 or Milcor, Type "K" with screwdriver operated lock. Stainless steel access panels in tile walls. C. Insulating Union: Epco, Capitol. D. Escutcheon: Grinnell Fig. 2 or 13, nickel plated. 2.04 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Pipe Hangers: Components and assemblies in accord with MSS SP -58 and ANSI 831.1. B. Duct Hangers: In accord with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. C. Vibration Isolation: Provide equipment by a single manufacturer and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Vibration isolators shall be coordinated with equipment supplied. Amber Booth Co., Mason Industries. 2.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment Nameplates: Black bakelite with white layer, 1/2" lettering with equipment schedule designation (e.g.: "EF -1, Exhaust Fan "). 15055 -2 B. Valve Tags: 1 -1/2" diameter brass, aluminum, or 3/32" plastic stamped to indicate service and valve number, 1/2" lettering, chain hanger. Valve list to be posted under glass or plastic in appropriate mechanical room and to be included in maintenance manual. C. Pipe Marking: Semi -rigid plastic coil markers with written legend, color -coded background, and flow arrow all in accord with ANSI A13.1 Letters to reflect drawings legend designations. 2.06 PAINT A. Factory Finished Equipment: See individual equipment specification. B. Ductwork: Paint interior of ductwork visible through grilles and diffusers with flat black paint. Prepare and paint surfaces in accord with Section 09900. 2.07 PIPE INSULATION A. Preformed Glass Fiber: 41b. density, 0.24K at 75° F mean temp., laminate jacket. Manville Micro -Lock, APT or equal. B. Foamed Plastic: 0.27K at 75° F mean temp., continuously sealed joints. Armstrong Armaflex or equal. 2.08 DUCT INSULATION A. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket (FGF): 2" thickness, 1 -1/2# density, minimum R -7 installed, foil jacket. Manville Microlite or approved. B. Insulation for Ducts exposed to Weather (i.e. exposed on roof): 2" thickness, 1 -1/2# density, duct liner with vapor barrier; minimum R -7 installed. CSG Ultraliner, Owens - Corning Fiberglas, Aeroflex. C. Relocation of existing duct: Match existing insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Underground Ferrous Piping & Fittings (Except cast iron soil piping): Machine wrap with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure sensitive tape 0.020" thick (Scotchwrap) to include risers at buildings to a minimum of 6" above grade. B. Pipes: Remove burrs by reaming. Use pipe cement on male threads only. C. Openings in Pipes: Keep closed during progress of work. 15055 -3 tit: D. Concealed Piping: Install so as not to interfere with light fixtures or other trade components. E. Close Nipples: Not permitted on any part of work. Use standard short nipples for short pipe connections. Use of bushings not permitted. F. Copper Tubing: Continuous. Copper tubing inserts in runs of steel pipe not permitted. Solder joints in copper piping. Do not lay copper tubing on rocks or gravel. G. Pipes of Dissimilar Metals: Make connections with insulating (Dielectric) unions. H. Cutting Copper Pipe: Use a cutter. Smooth sharp edges with emery cloth. I. Saddles on Pipe: Not permitted. 3.02 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Unions: Install at final connections to equipment and on control side of all valves in mains, branches and risers. B. Access Panels: Provide to service valves, dampers, motors, air vents or other concealed equipment. C. Escutcheons: Install at all places where exposed uncovered piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings. D. Galvanized Iron Sleeves: Not less than 20 gauge, cast in concrete installed wherever piping passes through concrete floors or walls. Sleeves for insulated pipe shall be of sufficient size to allow the covering to pass through sleeve. Use steel pipe extended 1" above finished floor for sleeves in floors of rooms exposed to water. For penetration of floors and walls from buried pipe, caulk annular space between pipe and sleeve with first quality oakum and fill with pitch. 3.03 MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Mechanical equipment and materials are not to be suspended or supported from pipe, electrical conduit, ceiling systems or any non- structural member. B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Item selections, hanger spacings, rod diameters, and protection shields in accord with MSS SP -69, except as otherwise indicated. Pipes shall not be hung or supported from each other. C. Multiple Pipe Supports: Where a number of pipes are hung with a common support e.g.: trapeze hanger), submit design criteria/calculation. 15055 -4 D. Structural Attachments: Beam clamps where possible. E. Vertical Adjusting Device: Provide on all rigid hangers. F. Protection Shield /Protection Saddle: Use on insulated pipe. G. Risers: Provide support at tee or elbow at base of risers. Provide pipe clamp support at each floor. H. Duct Hangers: Install in accord with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. I. Penetrations by Duct: Support duct at wall or floor and fill around duct with fiberglass. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment Nameplates: Affix prominently on equipment except in finished areas (e.g.: units in offices) where nameplates shall be inside access panel. . Pipe Marking: Every 30 feet, at wall or partitions, and at pipe junctions. Lettering oriented to be read from below horizontal centerline. 3.05 INSULATION A. Application: The following reflect minimum requirements. Designer shall specify insulation to comply with local energy codes. 1. Pipe Insulation PIPE SIZE Insul Fluff Type Runouts 1" 1 1/4"-2" ,2 1/2 " -6" Domestic CW Domestic HW, HWC, Rain Leaders and drain Bowls PGF /FP lh" PGF 1" PGF /FP 1/2" 1/2" 1/2 " 1/2" 1" 1" 1 1/2 " 1� " 1/2 " 15055 -5 B. Duct Insulation Duct Location Heated Only Building Exterior 2" Unconditioned Space 2" (e.g.: attics, clg. spaces, rtn. plenums C. Installation 1. Apply covering when building is thoroughly dry to prevent shrinkage. 2. Apply insulating cement to all fittings and valves equal to adjacent thickness and finish with preformed PVC fitting jackets. 3. Insulate all risers, branches and connections to equipment. 4. Insulate pipe at hangers and provide protection saddles or shields. 5. Do not insulate direct burial rainleader or cold water. 6. Do not insulate over equipment data labels. 7. Secure duct wrap with mechanical fasteners spaced 12" on center, minimum. For horizontal ducts 24" or more in width, duct wrap shall also be secured with mechanical fasteners spaced 18" on center, on centerline of bottom of duct. 8. Insulation is not required on sound lined ductwork with sufficient insulation value. 9. Insulate all rainleader drain bowls, down to first horizontal and all horizontal runs of pipe. END OF SECTION i i 1 1•. i 1.. 1_ 1 1 SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS SECTION 15300 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and the modifications thereto, and Division 1 - General Requirements. B. Conform to requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13. 1.02 SCOPE A. The fire sprinkler system modifications are to be design - build, but in conformance with conceptual information shown on the drawings. B. This section requires design and installation of modifications to existing sprinkler systems for building fire protection. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fire protection Contractor shall be licensed and regularly engaged in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler equipment as listed by UL or other nationally recognized testing laboratories. B. Contractor shall have been engaged in work of this section for a period of at least two years and have installed at least five such systems of comparable size. PART 2 DESIGN 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS Develop in accordance with NFPA No. 13, and the local Fire Marshal. Include detail plans of sprinkler systems including sections. Drawings shall show sprinkler heads, piping, piping supports, earthquake protections, etc. as may be required to formally meet all requirements of NFPA and approving authorities. 2.02 SPRINKLER HEAD LAYOUT Conform to symmetrical spacing and integrate into locations of lights and other ceiling devices. Center heads on ceiling tiles (+1") and align in straight rows. 15300 -1 2.03 SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings to Architect, Local Fire Marshal, and all other approving authorities. Drawings shall be approved by all agencies prior to fabrication or installation. PART 3 PRODUCTS 3.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS Schedule 40 black steel or thinwall pipe with cast iron or malleable iron screwed fittings or grooved end fittings. 3.02 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Pendent: 1/2" male thread, polished chrome finish and ordinary temperature rating (155 °F). Grinnell Universal Model A or approved. B. Upright: Standard type with 1/2" male thread, standard brass finish and ordinary temperature rating (155 °F). Grinnell Universal Model A or approved. C. Semi - recessed Pendent: 1/2" male thread, ceiling escutcheon, white finish and ordinary temperature rating (155 °F). Grinnell Model F700 or approved Model E -1. Head: Grinnell Universal Model A or approved D. Residential Pendent and Semi - Recessed: 1/2"male thread, ceiling Escutcheon, white finish, bulb type and ordinary temperature rating (155 °F). Grinnell F973 or approved. 3.03 WATER MOTOR ALARM Relocate as shown on plans, run new 3/4" water and 1" drain connection. PART 4 INSTALLATION 4.01 Coordinate installation with all other trades to insure room for all and minimize competition for space. 4.02 Typical sprinkler installation is sprinkler main and branch lines in furred ceilings, soffits, or joist spaces; and branch piping in joist space or other concealed space to sprinkler heads. Refer to Mechanical, Architectural, and Structural drawings. 4.03 Exposed sprinkler piping is permitted below skylights along skylight mullions. All exposed piping shall be painted to match adjacent serfaces. 15300 -2 AR DSTRWflOt4 schs Jaz 1,1301 DESCRIPTION urR NOBEL . tEL UOD. SIZE BORDER TYPE NEtk SIZE SURFACE . . NISI ACCESSORIES RMS SR- WS' Tins 300, NA .6 CW8 ITE 080, AMPERS TO BE PAINTED BLACK SR- TRZ1 303RSS 320 : -- '''''' MI= 0. WHITE OB, DAMPERS TO BE PAINTED BLACK RG--1 zz 3;a1L NA 16,3e ) NONE NONE DUCT FURNACE 1,1301 LOC NANO, St MODEL NO ON ' ,.. r' A S r RPM Sat : VOLTAGE OW REMARKS IZZ Or,'' , REMARKS LON .R00r LOW ROOF 6000 -- 1 ,, 0 : . ADD . 320 : -- 2S 120V/1t 425 OD 77 4 603 1 /311 200 6000 0 lb 400 , 320 26 120V/1. 425 00 SUPPLY FAN s SyMBC1, LOECION MAN111 V 8 ACIDEL NO SERVING OM S r RPM RO ' PIS 4 BHP HP VOL , ADE WEIGHT OW REMARKS ' ff , LOW ROOF DELHI MAIN N 829 - Kr 3 21 i 5 4 603 1 /311 200 000 /SF 2 LON RODE Dal 9215 MMN ENTRANCE ,,,,,,, , 8 29 .8. )3 21 5 . 4 60V/30 20 0 000 ELEETRICAL POWER WRING ANC/ DIScONNECT E1 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR LINE VOLTAGE. conrriROL WIRING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (D MANUAL 0,SIDE OPENING TO BE SET , 600 crai on) ELECTPC.W POWER WIRING AND DISCONNEC1 BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR V. CONTROL WMING Ett,RIC-AL CONTRACTOR CometerRretswt 1 $USMITTAL 110.1 This submittal has been clocked for i general compliance with Mc Contract Dopmmts as follows: a No Exceptions Takeo ii Corrections as Noted 1:1 Amin & Resubmit 0 IRETECTE) as Unacceptable N. In no way &es dis ispie. ,,..ue.e Subcontractor of responsdality for making necessary dimensional andjob checks required for themmmlmemielneclideern installation of his week cowed aus&T the Lem of his SubcootracL 1 BATLEY CONSTRUCTION F Date 10'-0 CLE/UR OF ALL OUTSIDE NR :IITI OPENINGS 40,40 ACCESS DOOR R EOUIZIMP TO BE FELD LOCATED BY ACCO AND r m'l>t, PFNETRADDN, BE BELO LOCATED AND / VERIFIED BY ACCO, PERETRATION ,.- ALL ROOF 10P EXTERIOR DUCT TO SUPPORTED A MIN. OF EVERY 10 SUPPORTS TD BE FIELD LOCATED Ey ACCO. FABRICATED AND INSTALLED BY ACCO. RG-1 PENETRATioni BE FIELD LOCATF-D GRILLE TO BE AND VERIFIED BY MOUNTED IN SIDE ACCO, PENETRATION WALL BY G.0 gn`cETOR - _ - - ; 2 .2;:KATION LOCATED BY AC PENETRATION BY 7 — THERMOSTAT LCCATION TO BE num LOCATED AND APPROVED BY OWNER \ \ \ THERMOSTAI TOZ M TF1 1 0 )C 4 T E E WS REPRESENTIVE ,D;TO P OF SOFFIT SR - 750 CFM iyp NEW fARCIPTECTURAL 'SEALED SOFFIT BY r * E = I ! 1_11 , I FUSED DISCONNECT OR BREAKtR BY (3) SMOKE DETECTOR BREAK ON DETECTION or SMOKE NOTE. ALL FIRE Af4D LIFE SAFETY WRING, SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEMS, FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS INCLUDING FOYER WIRING AND MONITORING OF SMOKE DECTECTORS BY OTHERS SEQUENCE OT OPERATiON: HEN THE 5 A CALL FOR MEAT THE FAN IS STARTED. THE FLOW SWITCH IN THE DUCTWORK VERIFIES FLOW AND STARTS THE DUCT HEATER 1ST STAGE. THEN SECOND STAGE UNTIL SETPOINT IS SATISFIED. IN A CALL FOR COOLING THE FAN AND HEATER WILL BE TURNED OFF. POWER LINE DIAGRAM SCALE NONE FaNIZE CFM IJ I ;1 120V-10 (!_ttUPPLY FAtf &.;:a...._.TPP121 FAN FLOOR PLAN - MAIN ENTRANCE HVAC SCALE: 1/4" = 1 Apov-30 144 Z 1 e+AGN - - Cr ,- C ' STAR R Vi/ 120V CONTROL „ TRANSFORMER MID' AAX. CONTACTS - -4 -4 I ail REMOTE NE , W EAL R O I ZATC., SR-2 3000 CFM , 7 754 I 200- TO A La I A 2A WT 9 R ? MINH HONEYWELL 7EA1 PROGRAIAABLE ImfRufrSlal T7300 WI 000:4.2106 SUBBASE & T70 REMOTE SENSOR [kj Etuar HEATER GS /iv DUCT HEATER 20,34 SUPPLY AIR DONN SF-AL TOP OF ELEC.TNICAL NOrES A-N0 W4, (11,00PV .DICATES CrEMS UrEcr, 0 O mNr_mtS ma,moinik ooiceat, utpAlts. FLEET... COT.ACTOR 5 _ ,Dre rorPPOS 4,`,1D room L. vOcT. GOMTPAC NOTO 7 COPTRA AND/OR LI.. CONDUCTITP? FAINNECOD. SHAUL RIE tux FAFXAMED 01 Ft1AieutAF0 CLECPYCAL PRILES., Asc (NOIAYBEAT. BLUPDARFO EFTRENE CAPE V. E. TAKEN AREA CONNrCu. Neritst OSSATT_Art 1.040 reeT $1 ItT = cowcto. T tourreetrie PIENALRED mit TOLuE 'TMATI PP PCEEPOTPRE WON THE t BOP 1 WA10 0 OrrDERTRECT - 0. APPPTY.D. PIDEPENCENT ATEAND CIT 1 itt.ck .L1.°01, T. EAVI ,, ECE E9,11PW, tr,tuttiL 4IE OPEARAD P. ;RAO OT TPE EDIFIRPPO SERVED APEN - PPE SDITITILP Ant. tFritr. 90 .1, 34=1 SFYFACE PErEF.O_E - 1 20 SEPOCIE PECEPTALLE 1044, 10*110 1.fi110 25 rtr AND oN OPE SAME LEVEL AS. tm€ C.J.VENT FEAT PANTENANCE TNE SEINicE PtcEMACLE STALL RN BE COAP.ECTIO rtioN OPT LOAD 310( DTE PCP.. PEAS0 or PSFLONNELY , I FIELD LOCATED AND APCIRO OPPER'S REPREsEsims 1 \ FIELD AND CONSTRUCTIBILITY DRAWING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS FIELD CHANGES TO ORIGINAL SIDER AND BYERS DESIGN SHOWN ON SHEETS M-1 AND M-2 OF THE PROJECT PERMIT DRAWING SET DATED 4-15-99. CITY OF TUKWILA PERMIT #M99-0083 BY RP' AN,:r tr,tamn krOZE , ht f • a-mmen. ea sir,— Lrit or camp RN* = plot glimmwas.. A No Date Revisions 66 -co63 NWT a£SUp■Ast. Cltscription 20 MOUNTED StDE WALL CLEAR OF ALL OUTSDE INTAKES OR BULDING OPENINGS ROOF TOP EXTEROR DUCT M BE ---, SUPPORTED A MIN. OF DEW ICE-O SUPPORTS TO F. FIELD LOCATED SP ACCO. FABRICATED mo muLLED Z 6120 CFM 22 PENETRATION MELD LOCATED BY ACCO. PENETRATION G.C. ALL TAD. 00 CONFORM TO MEC. PECPATLicAt crixic AuPTCRITETLS 04,411.4 i"), AeTe. SOCCIMAT,C Ohtlr .0 NOT rprE.015 ED TO 000W ALL DETAILS OF TEE sm., LocAMON ASO diEASUPEATESTS OF ALL cr_reS on rot SAE. PRYOR TO ENETALLATICrr.. 3 ALL £0-10TOTY SPPLA 1515 RECAP-ABLY CATALCY.E" OEMS CC 150 PRTUFACILPER APO SMALL BE SUPPLIED AS A COMPLETE 1500* Or ACCORDANCE W1l 515 wmtsx slANDApo SPE:Fie- CAMONS AND ANY ORNONAL RENS RECAMPED FOR PROPER INSTAL... UNLESS OrPERiese NOTBD, A ENEET PETAL ELL PRODuCTS STOLL COMP, • SPACNA OACI CONSTRuCblei STAND-ABCS. FIRST E00105, ADAUSYNC AND EtALTACrea, TORTS CAMP PAR, ce SYSTEM 10 OFSLIRE FLPTETTOTPTPTI CIF ALL C100ROLS. 0E0000 OLSCREXMCAP. APO ENURE SISCEIT LEFT AN OPERMING COrriDreCN 0 ALL 0551050. PAIC1.5* APO PANTINS OF ELEMENTS AND FINIGNED SURTACEl TS TO Pt VINE • T.E. CAMERAL COMITRACTOR., 1, INSULATE SI1PP0" 5101 10 *SEC SINNOAROS .6. SCA& ALL .+0 NECESSARY. 9. REPOTABLE CEM., PANEL OP PANELS AT FASE ALL Fp, DANPERS Apie FIREISIACKF DAMPENS 00 GENERAL CONMPTCTOP Cgocagric ver.) UNLESS ,,,,,,PARSE NOM, DDLAS T.O/CR TOPES'S REPELS TPPOLOR FRE PACED PALLS. SENT, CEUNCS. PUST ECUPL TRE PENETPATED "1. ALL 4.R.S. SMALL MADE Ter,BAL CONMACIOR. .2r ALL UNDERCUT DC,CPS NNI, 000P LOUsEPS APE E. GENERAL CCArcRACT, '13 . PEE APPLuTTCES MESICNED c0 PE FIYEE 5 1000015 SHALL 10 SECUCti, 0000555. 05 PLACE spACE. EOV 01* ENT ,HALL LABELED TS CO +PFC. ATEA , c SERA, NTANruso Fax LENS, , SUPPORT ' 'SACS CLP FARS. cOr AU_ 9ZES SPOT. APE SeEET PETAL SZES. 5uPTRA00 APPRETPMAII. DaTENVON FOR LANG CLINAN TPSSE CLEAR miNsrms. ry PROMS NEC SOX ventacu AtirP0SG CLEXPE.S.E. . MOW CC Am( BECTPIMAL. PRP, GEESE E rxravElic TEM.PPLET 10.. Precmuf. oliFFLLEEP TAR. CCPPAT.BLE RIP 05*5.00 100 100011 T0 Anrririrc REELECTED axr, PLANS , OR CETI,G5 GEKERAL NOTES — — — Poem:Ain. TO SE \ FELD LmwEs AND L VERSED 63Y ..CO, PENETRAT. C.C. REVISIONI NO I GAS PIPING 1gND REGULATOR BY B" EBNER& 40,ur re.r. RACIK 15,/ ACCESS DOCR ACCO F.5 30/30 WERS SLE,ERS FOR E01.2PSAENVI SUPPORT TO BE P,-JD LOCATE,D Enr A000 AND PREPOCED AND \ JAN 5 2000 00 - MUNN cagany, Mc. 835 N. CENTRAL AvENUE. Sun 132 KFJC, NASIMGTON S8C32 (253) 854-e C,,ACKEL, Project SOUTHCENTER MALL RENOVATION TuKWILA WA Title HVAC PLAN, DETALS, SCIEDS AND NOTES ALTERNATE DESIGN JF LN Designee By Checked By F SA Croon By 914236 Job Number AS SHOWN SDJ .DWG SCG1e Project Manager SD-1 1 Of 1 Sheets OWNER SOUTH E MALL RENOVATION TL THE RICHARD E JACOBS GROUP. INC 25425 CENTER RIDGE ROAD CLEVELAND. OHIO 44145 -4122 BHON: i440) 671-4800 CONTACT RICHARD 9 vANDERBURG. AIA CITY OF TUKWILA CITY OF TUKWE A DEPT OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 6500 SOUTHCENTER BLVD -WK.. . WA 06188 PHONE 1206) 4 31•6, CONTACT BRENDA HOLT. PERMIT TECHNICIAN GENERAL NOTES D CODES / PERMITS / REGULATIONS jai MAINTAIN Toe WORK AREA CLEAN AND FREE OF DEBRIS. REMOVING WASTE MATERIALS DAILY. A. DRAWINGS THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO DESCRIBE THt OVERALL SCOPE OF WORK. CONTRACTORS SHALL F?tLD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ALERT ARCHITECT TO ANY UNFORESEEN CONSTRUCTION DIFFICULTIES BEPORE BEGINNING WORK • PRE - CONSTRUCTION MEETING PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION OR DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE A PRE - CONSTRUCTION MEETING WITH THE LOCAL BUILDING DEPARTMENT OR LOCAL PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT VERIFY WHICH AGENCY WILL BE INVOLVED DURING THIS MEETING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE LOCAL INSPECTOR WE, A PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE. THE CONTRACTOR AND INSPECTOR WILL THEN TENTATIVELY SCHEDULE SEVERAL PHASED INSPECTIONS COORDINATE A LETiON OF NO SCHEDULE WORK WITH OWNER. PROJECT MANAGER TO ASSURE TIMELY CDMP WORK. TH SHOPPING CENTER AND SIT W'lll MAINTAIN N ORMAL OP ERATING HOURS TNRO WHOUT JACENT THL DURATION OF TH`S WORK CONDUCT ALL WOR TO MINI MIZE INTERRRENCE W ITH AD BUILDING AREAS AND O PERATIO NS CONFINE STAGING AND STORAGE FOR THIS WORK AND PARKING FOR CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL AND DELIVERIES TO AREAS ARRANGED FOR PRIOR TO START OF WORK BY OWNER PROJECT MANAGER. GC TO COORDINATE STAGING AREA WITH OWNER C REPET1Tlve TYPICAL WALL SECTIONS FINISHES AND DETAILS ARE NOT INDICATED EVERYWHERE THEY OCCUR ON PLANS. ELEVATIONS, AND SECTIONS. REFER TO DETAILED DRAWINGS. CON- TRACTOR TO PROVIDE AS if DRAWN IN FULL CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS NECESSARY INCLUDING THE BUILDING PERMIT. CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO PAY FOR ALL OTHER CHARGES. pets. OR COSTS CHARGED BY THE BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION DEPARTMENTS. UTILITY AGENCIES, OR PRIVATE COMPANIES WHICH REQUIRE SUCH COSTS FOR OR PRIOR TO INSTALLATIONS. NOTHING IN THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO PERMIT AN INSTALLATION IN VIOLATION OF APPLICABLE CODE . 5HOUL3 ANT CHANGE IN T+4 DRAWINGS Be NECESSARY IN ORDER TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND /OR REQUIREMENTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AT ONCE AND CEASE WORK ALL PARTS PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AATEST RULES. REGULATIONS, RESTRICTIONS, REQUIREMENTS. AND CODES ADOPTED BY THE JURISDICTION HAVING AUTHORITY OVER THE WORK ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE 7007 UNIFORM BUILDING CODES AS ADOPTED BY CITY OF TUKWILA THE WASHINGTON AMENDED CODE AND ALL JURISDICTION RULES AND REGULATIONS E DIMENSIONS. SURVEY DIMENSIONS OF SITE CONDITIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE FROM A SURVEY BY OTHERS ARCHITECT BEARS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCURACY OF SAME DIMENSIONS ARE SHOWN 'FAE OF FRAMING AT EXERIOR W A S AND TO FACE OF FINISH AT INTERIOR WALLS FACE OF TO GMU C OR CENTERLINE OF OPE UNLE DETAILED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. USE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND ACTUAL FIELD MEASUREMENTS NOTIFY THE OWNER /ARCHITECT PROJECT MANAGER IF ANY DISCREPANCIES ARE FOUND THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL ROUGH. DIMENSIONS FOR THE EQUIPMENT FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY HIMSELF OR OTHERS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONSULT THE PLANS OF ALL TRADES FOR OPENINGS THROUGH SLABS. WALL. CEILINGS. AND ROOFS FOR DUCTS, PIPES. CONDUIT, CABINETS. AND EQUIPMENT: AND SHALL VERIFY THE SIZE AND LOCATIONS WITH SUBCONTRACTOR. • SHOP DRAWINGS PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR THE ARCHITECTS /OWNER'S APPROVAL AND AS REQUIRED BY THE CITY OF TUKWILA PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF THAT PORTION OF WORK SPECIAL INSP:CTy0N, OWNER TO HIRE A TESTING LAB FOR SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE CITY OF TUKWILA AT THE TINE OF THE BUILDING PERMIT SUBMITTAL PNOVDE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD AS NECESSARY AND AS REQUIRED FOR ATTACHMENT OF ALL HARDWARE, CASEWORK PARTITIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS SURFACE MOUNTED ITEMS INSTALLED A5 A PART OF THIS WORK OR BY OTHERS IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS WORK COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH OWNER, PROJECT MANAGER. • CONTRACTOR TC FRAME OPENINGS IN WALLS. CEILINGS, AND FLOORS FOR HVAC AND OTHER MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL WORK WHERE REQUIRED AND NOT OTHERWISE SHOWN ON PLANS COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE REGULATIONS FOR BARRIER -FREE FACILITIES IWAC 51.30.11001 INCLUDING II MAXIMUM THRESHOLD HEIGHT TO BE ONE HALF INCH 11/21 ALONG ACCESSIBLE ROUTE OF TRAVEL 21 STAIR NDSINGS TO BE FLUSH. SLIP- RESISTANT. AND ROUNDED TO RADIUS OF ONE HALF INCH 11/21 MAXIMUM 31 PROVIDE SIGNS MARKING ACCESSIBLE ROUTE OF TRAVEL 9 CONSULTANTS ARCHITECT MITHUN PARTNERS. INC. 414 OLIVE WAY. SUITE 500 SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 08101 PHONE 12081625.5344 FAX 12061812.170• CONTACT, MICHAEL HOWATT STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ABKJ INC 800 FIFTH AVENUE SUITE 3800 SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 08104.3103 PHONE 12061540.2255 FAX 12061 3.04166 CONTACT ALAN C.JCHNSAN. PE KEY PLAN ZW s in ton MECHANICAL ENGINEER SIDER 8 BYERS ASSOC_ INC 180 NICKERSON. SURE 304 SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 08100 PHONE 12061 285 -2066 FAX (2061 285 -1045 CONTACT GOREN C. HATTATOGLU LIGHTING DESIGNER ART 6 SCIENCE LIGHTING DESIGN 181 STONEBROOKE OVAL ORANGE VILLAGE. OHIO 44022 PHONE. 4401 540 -0552 FAX 14401 340-0554 CONTACT: RON FRIEDMAN 7.0 000RS / WINDOWS A MOTMG PERMIT PHASE B INTERIOR LANDUCALING MARK ATCHISON 203 LOOKOUT LANE PATASKALA OHIO 43062 PHONE. 1814) 865.0363 FAX: (6141 863 -0800 ENERGY REQUIREMENTS — THERMAL/MOISTURE PROTECTION A OPENINGS. ALL OPENINGS TO BE CAULKED, SEALED OR WEATHER-STRIPPED. GLAZING PROVIDE GLAZING PER UNIFORM BUILDING CODE AND WASHINGTON ENERGY CODE. GLAZING IN LOCATIONS SUBJECT TO HUMAN IMPACT SUCH AS PANES IN DOORS. GLAZING WITHIN A 24• ARC OF A DCJR OPENING. GLAZING WITHIN 18 OF T , e FLOOR (AND IS OVER 0 SO FEET PER PANEL] SHALL BE TEMPERED OR LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS PER UNIFORM BUILDING CODS SECTION 2406 GLAZING. U -VALUE MAMMA TesTID) U • 000 MAXIMUM NNREC SEC 131211 W/ MAXIMUM SHGC OF 10 O DOORS 0 -VALUE TO 210 U • 000 MAXIMUM (NREC SEC 1312.17 C. COORDINATE EXITING /CONSTRUCTION PHASING PLAN WITH THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT TO BE SUBMITTED TO THE CITY AS PART OF THIS BUILDING PERMIT D MAINTAIN BARRIER -FREE ACCESS AND EGRESS DURING ALL PHASES OF CONSTRUCTION. NOISE PROTECTION A ALL WORK TO COMPLY W1T11 CITY OF TUKWILA NOISE ORDINANCE. CHAPTER 822 B CONSTRUCTION WHICH MAY EXCEED me STANDARD NOISE ORDINANCE LEVELS SHALL OCCUR BETWEEN THE HOURS OF 7:00 A.M. AND 10:00 P. M. ON WEEKDAYS AND WEEKENDS. ....._. MERVYNI j/ ELECTRICAL MINDER SPARLING 720 OLIVE WAY. SUITE N SEAT2It. WASHINGTON 06+01•+633 F 1206) 867 -0555 FAX. 12061 867-0554 CONTACT TERRY SLAYiON GRAPHICS ONION ZZ DESIGN. INC 1660 SOUTH B[LVOIR BLVD SOUTH EUCLID. OHIO 44121 PHONE /FAX. 14401 381.8601 CONTACT, RICK ZIM0ERMAN B ALL FLASHING AND ARCHITECTURAL SHEET METAL TO BE 24 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL :FACTORY PRIMED AND FIELD PAINTED.WNERE VISIBLE 8' -0' MINIMUM LENGTHS. PER SMACNA MANUAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED C. CAULKING AND SEALANTS: USE PRIMERS AS RE011IRED BY MANUFACTURER BACKING RODS OR TAPE AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER. USE POLYURETHANE SEALANTS AT CON - RETE FLOOR AND SIDEWALK JOINTS. ALL OTHER [CATIONS USE POLYSULFIDE USE EIF.5 COMPATIBLE CAULKING WHERE REQUIRED. 15EE SPEC! D. VAPOR BARRIERS. CONTINUOUS APPROVED VAPOR BARRIERS SHALL BE INSTALLED Pelt DETAILS. [ P INSU SCR LATI I ON VE APP PROROIDE ACH. INSULATION PER WASHINGTON STATE 1004 NREC. CHAPTER 15 REPTI ROOF. MINIMUM R OPAQUE 'VALES NIMUM R•11 PERIMETER SLAB ON GRADE MINIMUM R -10 F ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE SPACE HEAT IS NOT ALLOWED FOR PRIMARY HEATING SYSTEM !NREC SEC 13021 G SEE DRAWINGS FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS. FIRE PROTECTION A PROVIDE AN AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER AND ALARM SYSTEM PER NFPA 13 AND AS APPROVED 81 THE CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DEPARTMENT AND FIRE DEPARTMENT. 6 PROVIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AS REQUIRED BY UNIFORM BUILDING CODE STANDARD 10-1 LOCATED PER FIRE MARSHALL DIRECTION. C MAINTAIN STRUCTURAL 5 FIRE RESISTIVE INTEGRITY AT WALL PENETRATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 8 MECHANICAL. PLUMBING. 5 COMMUNICATION CONDUITS, PIPES AND SIMILAR SYSTEMS PER UBC AND F MUT REQUIREMeNTS PRO FIRESTOPPING A55[MOLI[S WITH UL LISTINGS ACCEPTA BLE TO UAL THE CITY OF TUKWILA VIDE D MAINT418 FIRE VEHICLE ACCESS ANO EXISTING WIDTH OF FIRE LANES ATC L TIMES DURING CONSTRUCTION IMPLEMENT TEMPORARY DR ?VE AISLES AS REO'D WHERE CONS INTRUDES INTO FIRE LANES. E. COORDINATE FIRE WATCH WITH CITY FIRE MARSHALL 8 MAINTAIN WHENEVER THE MALL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM IS DISABLED OR SHUT DOWN DURING NORMAL MALL OPERATING HOURS. A. MAINTAIN EXISTING EXIT CORRIDORS IN PUBLIC MALL AT FULL WIDTH DURING ALL PHASES OF CONSTRUCTION. THIS WIDTH WILL BE BASED UPON THE AGGREGATE WIDTH OF ALL THE DOORS AT THE NEAREST ENTRANCE B PROVIDE TEMPORARY EXITING, INCLUDING TEMPORARY EXIT CORRIDORS. AS REO'D TO MAINTAIN FULL EXIT WIDTH DURING CONSTRUCTION. TEMPORARY EXIT CORRIDORS MUST BE OF 1 -HOUR FIRE - RATED CONSTRUCTION AND EXTEND FULL - HEIGHT UP TO ROOF DECK. IF A TEMPORARY ONE -HOUR CEILING IS INSTALLED. PROVIDE TEMPORARY FIRE SUPPRESSION AS REQUIRED BY THE FIRE MARSHALL ABOVE SUCH CEILING SPACE. BUILDING PERMIT PHASING: A. MISCELLANEOUS PERMIT APPLICATION. INCLUDES MECHANICAL WORK- -SEE MECH. PLANS. B. NEW COMMERCIAL /ADDITION /MULTI•FAMILY PERMIT: INCLUDES NEW MAIN ENTRANCE REMODEL AND ADDITION OF NEW GROSS LEASABLE AREA OF 5.355 SF BY NEW MAIN ENTRANCE C. COMMERCIAL /MULTI- FAMILY TENANT IMPROVEMENT /ALTERATION PERMIT: INCLUDES REMAINDER OF PROJECT. INCLUDING SEARS. NORTH. AND WEST ENTRANCES. NEW SKYLIGHTS. NEW MALL FLOORING AND INTERIOR REFURBISHMENT. AND NEW EXTERIOR CANOPY 0105 RETROFIT - -SEE PLANS PROJECT DATA ZQBE TUC -- Nog,. URBAN attire* OCCUPANCY A•21 CONSTRLICTIO3 TYPE 'I -N SPRU KL0REO BUILDING CODE 1007 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE 9V1 STATE AMMENDMENTS 1007 UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE W/ STATE AMMENDMENTS 1981 UNIFORM PLUMSIM0 COOS W/ STATE 08509050505 1007 NATIONµ ELECTRICAi CODE ■1 STATE 4401N051500 1007 NATIONAL FIRE CODE 81 CITY AND STAT0 AMMENDMENTS 1007 ADA AND WAC 1007 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE ABBREVIATIONS ACOUSTIC CetuNG PANeL ACTUAL ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL ASPHALT 71LE AVERAGE BLOCKING BRICK- BEDROOM CARPET CONCRETE BLOCK CEMENT CERAMIC TILE CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CENTER LINE CEILING 2 0 CLOSET C ON CONSTRUCTION O CONCRETE CO, 15 CONTINUOUS CDR CORRIDOR C TO C CENTER TO CENTER CW COLD WATER DTL DETAIL D DRINKING FOUNTAIN D: A DIAMETER 0 DIMENSION ON DOWN DG DITTO DR DINING ROOM. DOOR OS DOWNSPOUT DWG DRAWING °A EACH ELEVATION EXISTING EXTERIOR FINISH FLOOR FLASHING FURNISHED BY OWNER. INSTALLED BY COINTRATOR FO FINISH OP ENIN G FRT FIRE RETARDANT TREATED GA GAUGE GA'_V GALVANIZED G_ GLASS G/IB GYPSUM WALLBOARD HC HOLLOW CORE HOW HARDWARE H1 HOLLOW METAL 'HCR HORIZONTAL HEIGHT 3 HOT WATER -VlT HOT WATER TANK 10 INSIDE DIMENSION : \cLL lNSULATTON :NT INTERIOR LONG. LINE LAVATORY LIVING ROOM LIGHT MARBLE MATERIAL VAT. MAXIMUM METAL MINIMUM MASONRY OPENING MULLION NOT APPL:CADLe NATURAL NOT IN THIS CONTRACT NUMBER NOMINAL NOT 2O 08ALE ON CENTER OUTSIDE DIMENSION PAINT PLASTER• PLAT. L4MINATE PLYWOOD QUARRY TILE RISER, RADIUS REINFORCING BAR REFRIGERATOR, REFERENCE REVISION ROOM, ROOMS ROUGH OPENING STAIN b VARNISH \A` RE RE! Rv RYE. RD 5 5 SOLID CORE SC—, _ SC [DU SECTION sHeeT SPECIFICATIONS SQUARE Feel STAIRWAY STeeL STRUCTURAL SUSPENDED SHEET VINYL READ- THICKNESS THRESHOLD TYPICAL UNFIN15Heo URINAL VINYL COMPOSITION VERTICAL WIDTH NVATER CLOSET WOOD. WORKING DRAWINGS WINDOW 5'V WROUGHT IR NVATERP....... ON TILE DRAWING SYMBOLS NORTH ARRDv GRID LINE VALE ECi(Ory BUILDING SECi1ON BETAIL DE TAIL DOM HARK ROOM rvAME s NUMBER PINISM MARK INTERIOR ELEVATION MARK Ooh WALL TYPE MARK O Cui LINE Rft E XX MIA CR NE 6 ITEM BELOV i c DOR pa Or SUBTL(X1R - E - E V..a� -U• ALIGN Far (NEVI 23. f ExlSi ,i HATCH L :15 DRAWING WIN G_ LI V8 A V ICH tI71IYi7 lIY LJI..A ARCHITECTURAL `0:0 COVER SHEET GENERAL NOTES AND PROJECT DATA, . 010 DEMOLITION PLAN D20 DEMOLITION PLANS AT ENTRANCES A2 0 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN -- WEST A21 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN -- CENTER A2 2 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN -- EAST A2.3 MAIN ENTRANCE ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATION A2 4 MAIN ENTRANCE ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS A25 VAIN ENTRANCE ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS Al 6 SEARS EN'TRA'NCE PLANS A27 SEARS ENTRANCE ELEVATIONS AND SECTIONS A28 WEST ENTRANCE PLANS. ELEVATIONS. 6 SECTIONS A2 0 NORTH ENTRANCE PLANS. ELEVATION. & SECTIONS A2 TO PARTIAL ROOF PLAN SKYLIGHT AREAS A30 ENLARGED PLANS - TOILET ROOMS AS 0 N ERIOR DETAILS A61 SKYLIGHT SECTIONS 6 DETAILS A6 2 SKYLIGH AND INTERIOR DETAILS AS3 CANOPY RETROFIT DETAILS 4,6 MAIN ENTRANCE SECTIONS AND DETAILS A6 WAIN ENTRANCE SECTIONS AND DETAILS A66 SCARS ENTRANCE SECTIONS AND DETAILS A67 00E57 b NORTH ENTRANCE DETAILS A68 INTERIOR DETAILS A60 INTERIOR DETAILS A70 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -- WEST A7• PARTIAL REFLECTED CEI'L.ING P' CENTRAL A72 PARTIAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -- EAST 4,8 T0 GN ERIOR ELEVATIONS A00 SC+HED'1LE5 STRUCTURAL SI T 52" 5 52 3 52 52 5 526 C3' R09T 12AM.:T49 ?JL1t 534 'FOOT TQA,v :TlS TLAN fs'r3 !1007 'T54541 IC 1.A14 561 RA'Mi,NG DETAILS 56 2 FRAM :NG DETAILS Y -ILIAC AND PH 540ING PLANS V -2 FIRE PROTECTION PLANS. MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 6 DETAILS ELECTRICAL 00 0 050 015 ET ET 515 Et 6 ET 7 ET 8 E1 ET TO E1" E2 -0 021 E22 E23 03 0 E31 E3 04 0 041 GENERAL NOTES b ABBREVIATIONS WEST ENTRANCE PLANS AND ELEVATIONS SEARS ENTRANCE/SEARS 6 NORDSTROM SKYLIGHTS MAIN ENTRANCE PLANS AND ELEVATIONS MAIN ENTRANCE 6 00N COURT PLAN NORTH MALL ENTRANCE PLANS b ELEVATIONS MAIN MAUL b .7CPENNEY SKYLIGHTS INTERIOR LANDSCAPE IL -2.0 10105105 505 LANDSCAP PLAN IL INTERIOR E RIOR LANDSCAPE PLAN IL -2 2 10/05108 LANDSCAPE PLAN GRAPI'HICS G -t 5060 LOCATION PLANS. FOOD COURT SIG G -2 SIGN TYPES VICINITY MAP ey d '`.....,..�_.. J LEGEND. GENERAL NOTE5. FIXTURE SCHEDULE 6 15200 OF 0065 3 MOLIT:ON PLAN - POWER 6 LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN - POWER 6 LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN - POWER 6 LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN - POWER 6 LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN - LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN - LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN - POWER DEMOLITION PLAN - POWER DEMOLITION P=-.AN - LIGHTING DEMOLITION PLAN - POWER 6 LIGHTING OEIJOLITION. PLAN - P01Aa - 6 LIGHTING 5E51000V DEMOLITION PLAN - POWER - FOOD COU,R! - TENANT LIGHTING - PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN WEST LIGHTING - PARTIAL FLOOR Pd ANN CENTER LIGHTING - PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN EAST LIGHTING AND POWER - PARTIAL ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS POWER - PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN WEST POWER - PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN CENTER POWER - PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN EAST PANEL SCHEDULES DETAILS SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: ❑ MECHANICAL EIELECTRICAL ID PLUMBING 2 PIPING c10Y OF TUKWILA CU. 1011' I DIVISION 1NKLER 50V0 uxT- E± t1V 8b Plan Check I sJ,C: to arOrs MI CRMWOIM IP:r^s cues aat aBRrRD i IIMMIOO of U o E �Z' FILE COPY 6.8 CITY OFF:% SITE J1%•3 � A'TnVE • SIR - ;'DER SEND. TUKWILA RECET GmoPn NO SCALE PERNUT C INTER NOT FOR CONSTR. Mv a A 0= DS DS =3 1 ; -99 r S EGISTECT ARCHITECT IXOMAS0. DARICH STATE Q WASCNGTCN FOR PERMIT ONLY THIS DOCUMENT HAS beeN PR[PA.R0D FOR PERMIT APPLICATION AND IS 5116UECT TO REVIEW AND MODIFICATIONS 150 60VERN0ENTAL 50ENOIe9 COVER SHEET GENERAL NOTES AND PROJECT DATA 9529 9 \08294 \CAD \A00 A0.0 CTION�A4 dK PERMIT /310 „,A14131k Ex WIT IFENTNABE----\ Ty, FLF71,AN - t7 3,SW.MY coneoar TO Ex,57 , A WLEACER IV =CYAN, eCCOVOINATE :PAC. I _ - 4FOR ROC DrdIN CONNECT/Ow RETIOvE Ex Ne. PLENUMS a...es (rrr. Poe 9i 0 FM. „ MO, CA4/9£, CO' ANC F14,TON ExIST PAVEFLEN7 TO MATO, EXIST REWIRED SEARS ENTRANCE MECHANICAL PLAN Scale: 1/18* • 1 (AN, AIX liwrGor 1..4/SEE-WIST act4N per Asove rew CEL CONNECT NEW 4” Cal TO EX.T. ABOVE COL IN0 EXTEIC c=n,NEFr 7.0 Ex157, PIPE OWLO W AND STPA55 VAL.' HHI NEW SWOP ca. au GATE ...LYE ABOvE CEILING DN TV NB CD) . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DUCT UP TO Exr.ST RooF roF FAN Nap ciu -.ore CEILING 0 cowEcr new FixnecE TO Ex/57. LAL Cia laASTE AND YENT USE EXISTING wry' 4 Ca/ STOPS _ -yeAryr-Exwrs. 0607 TO :4S-NECESECARY TO ACCOICDATE NEW CEILING 7 Ex/51 TRANS GRILLE AND ASSLCLATED DLICTILORC fmrtcyr rvor. 14"o EX SANI7ARY7 \ MUER LINE Cill ABOvE C,EIL /NG NEW, ClU RISER rEit4Fr LOC....41rinv cs. BELO 5LAE - 2 I RE7 ExiST. GRILLE INSTALL VITA 17,0 DUCT CONNECT TO Exist. OUCT ABOVE CEILING IT, OF 9 ExIST ExHALIST DUCT (Tr, WOMEN'S RESTROOM MECHANICAL PLAN Scale: 1/8 • 1 r DUG"' BELOW IN TOWEL FEFEORATEO 1 SlITZ,CE al/R VE EXIST 16"X ‘W/C1.4. OUCTANIY ■,„,! 1 8.4_41NICE Ex.?. O.71.71=ER • AEU/ NEW . INSIALLED (7 OF ARCWITECTIA24L COLL0 REIVVE EXIST kEA7ne PLE BCXEB AND C.R11 - - „-_- Al5ANI:ON ExISTNG MCTIi./(9/.C ri3O retiocfe erruss VALVE .413Mr/A. r .c.4,baccwom4 re REMOVE Exi5r CW RISER . CAP BELOW SLAYS AISAI.COV EXIST. 4, I EX BEL.' FLOOR ; SOY.IT BY C.G. 17: ••• EX/57. SERVICE 5 I le•S I CONNECT NE/) 4 Cal l-ALI TO EX P/PING EX Cw IN SANITARY CHASE rR4N9Fee aRILLE CM:D TRANSFER GRILLE CN WALL all F/5 04111,,-- EXIST LOU WEIGHT 7, COW DRAIN P/FE covEcr RAIsEo ORAN TO EXIST. 049) ' NEU 3/4" GAS L NE ROCFCN ns.rore'ExISt AREA DRAINS LW ROOF 1;17.7, FLEX/LE DUCT Scale: 1/8 • 1 T TT.' tauer ° itoofees,e7,04nov erociarOYASI , .1e:00". XI? ROFMS4 :Pier Tt:94CE71.4■W • , EXIST. EXHAUST oucr rn, 0 CONNECT TO Ex/sr. 11//7, 12X8 DUCT DsCT ABOW CEILING DUCT A.00.0' CEILING CONNECT NEW GAO ABANDON EXIS11. PIPE AT MS PONT GMT ON PENIMa.0 E ER —1 IN COL OLeIN, (COORDINATE G.0 1 RAIN LEADER UP _Li ROOF DRAIN CONVECTION/ •• 1.\ FOR DOOR W ATING SYSTEM MN DRAIN PIPE SELO U GRADE, CUT AND PATO\ (5171TETRICA1 00TH SIDES '\ EXIST. PAVEMENT TO PTA rck Ex1EX/5t. AS RECUI.D\ E .E...EP AN NN, ,--- 7..e.Oorce-V 1157 , • iv I MAIN ENTRANCE MECHANICAL PLAN 1-10-1 Scala: 1/18' • 1 1 RG.2 I EX/87. NIGH PRESSURE ,OAS LAE ON ROOF Ex1,57. FLOOR CLEAVOUF CONNECT NEU OUL NE TO EXIST 4R L� (.4prw(4X LOC.4TICN) „ EX. 6 , , SAN SEJER Ns< ' cAp EKST. CONDENSATE DRAW PPE' LOU SLAB Ca/ al 4 CsATE VALVE asoys Nfr swop cell,. / • A Ji - - - I RG- 1 Et Exisr. GRILLE imsrALL .‘ • C�C r ro exisr, O_Q :0 -EXIST EXHAUST DUCT MEN'S & FAMILY RESTROOM MECHANICAL PLAN ca2.7.4 0 COORDNATE LOC-ANON "Exer PUIVLEAIOEV 4.49.TEC 0.1401AGS Mlt. AUALEACER 999 CONNECTED TO AN Ex ORAN MIFF ABOVE CET,. F SOO A LNE EXIST w 74 PROxIIITY Tmy ® M.' LARGE RELOCATE,' To Accomo, P./ .n.4, JC PENNY CORRIDOR MECHANICAL PLAN Scale: 1/10' • 1 I REMOVE E.X151: NOSE Se AND Cal PIPING , CAP AT HAIN ORANCN _REwCWE ExIST CONDENSATE DRAiN ExIST OY,1-RLWR TO ROUYN EXTEND ANC ccaNnecr CD PIPE - TO EXISTSa CD FTFE 3/4 ON TO 43 REMOvE EXIST. GRILLE 4 INSTALL or, aze DUCT CONNECT TO Ex157 oucr ABOvE KTYP. 2.1 DUCT LS. TO Re,,OF TOP FAN C31.0 1111 REri Exisr. FIXTURE CONNECT NEW FIXTURE ro Exisr. LOCAL Ca; Ha( WASTE AM: vENT. USE EXISTING NW CW STOPS RET1OvE EXI57. AND alrAci. NEW FY.U.SN VALvE 0 RE110vE EX/57 rfums GRILLE AND AS.SOCIATE.D CX/C/M2NK M-1 ITN DOOR HEATING SYSTEM ENLARGED PLAN Scale: 1/8' • 1 GENERAL NOTES: 1. ANY PLuuB,NO OR *iv,' ,P,NO CONFLICT wiTH NEW SKvtiGHT REROU NO ExPosED PLIAIEING OR mi. CL, REV.. AT NEw SK,IGHT AREA. 2. REPLACE EX WORN Ou', ITEMS Su:. AS CLEAN°, CO,RS ARE Le',WED woR, AREA. 3. AT WO, ENTRANCE AND RDOODELED CORROORS, RA'SE ALL PLU1/9,NG AND HVAC PANG ABOVE NEW CE,NC LA,ESS 0, No7E, oN 4. RAISE A. D.&'. GRA,S, CLEA COVERS AND VC. To SYMBOL MECHANICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND EX , ST CA ASEIRV DESCRIPTION S_TTRL DLCT RSTCTA CR Ex,A,ST DUCT COve,NAT,CN TIRE 1 SiKT,CE GAPER T,RN•NS vANS 15 CaD WATER EX ST EXISTING ATF haziE F IN,SHED , ,CCR NTS NOT TO SCALE SS STAiNlESS STEEL NB VEC,V,1 CAL EDE , MH News C DS LA:, NOTE MITHUN .10.1^r. WRIT G.H. MOO AP. 15 VW .1 19111500.91vg M1 ar-U r rsai (e. ass-Wg NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION • et, itt 4.111. fa FOR PERMIT ONLY IBIS DOCUMENT HAS DUN FIMPARLD FM PERMIT ANSICATION NV IS SARCT TO Review AND MODIFICATIONS BY SENDRNIADRAL MMUS va HVAC AND PLUMBING PLANS , 106,40C.44TE SPRINCLERIP NEWSPRoNKLER ,, EADS PER ARCWITECTLI*E.Q. DET.AK EA frJL 4 PRO,DE n4E44,PRIAKLER 4.4E.4.6 , /VFW es/masc. W.4 0 / NEW 4SECES0Er s,enrci.se nv war CE0.0.. EXIST. 4" STORT DRAIN KEW LOCATIONFOR PIPE IL.P 2 COLLOYN WATER I GONG FRO,IDE INDIRECT DRAIN AND COWECT TO CLOSEST SD LINE RELOCATE EXIST. 40.4tER MOTOR ALA., GONG REITO/E ALL ASSOCIATED .5/.10/AKIER .4442 DRAIN PIPING CAP DRAIN PIPING BELOW FLOOR „ FIRE SPRINKLER RENOVATION PLAN SCALE: NTS RELOCATE ExistasarcRe e MAIN ENTRANCE FIRE PROTECTION PLAN SCALE: 7 EXIST. SD BEL. SLAB NEW LCCATION FOR WATER MOTOR ALARPIGONG CeuLK EXTERiOR SAEATRAG WALL PENETRATION DETAIL Scale: NONE MECHANICAL FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 40,P "IV AC- AA 3.52 4 3 , 1.• •S•2 VA,22 SIVA S2 ' AtS C MA, P SP-2 SJ.P.4 FEG.STER PS-2 RE7,3, P, wF4 077.E.L 314" 40,3 4 3M , , MP PS FLO", „3" 2,23 R.V. "3.4 NA. 12 " 7" 2 . V .• , • AFPAAFD 34,000 510 31," 1 ,AC "4041 3 I • R* 214 S-S 2 •22 223 ".4": .2 S .. .."C C SEE 32. , " 4 2,4 •, , , ,73"4„,47 • 2' -2,33 c : '2 VAVGA3 PSS 4 " ^4; TL SFASC0 V VA: S4 24 .7 ,AWSNE4 C WDX4•24:, Et AA, r•LASS :o' 3/ cs c Ac. SKR _XSE 3 , .....,' - -..,.. al. , :a F43E 44:1 CZCL: 1.4'.-3 VD, , 4 0AT'S. 4 S FLA. 3.0:C CCU 0 C.` SP. 6E0 UV 0 4 34 23 SED 4.4 3 0 ,33 AD :ES 000: CLAE r CDF ,C :RAACE0 443 C4 0 3' 4E40 4, L4.0 , 45 , 4F 00 A33.44" .41, STA0T 50,04 FLDAT 1047:103 43,8' , ACE War CO- DEFLECT.= •44,HTE, V aFFFOSED SLAM D0PER tDAIATE. 3 W. PAINTED ■44 SLACK) 44 S4A244 VOLNT, .81.37 DEFLECT. WAIL, w/ OPPOSED BLADL DAVFTLR (DAMPE2S S&L BE PA04TED IN 3:ACK) 3,12 E1.33 CAE. ALLmis4.44 0,TE Es:AWL 3.:3S 2 2S CRATE. SLRFACE 4 Eke4E_ SL.FACE 0HiTE ENANEL MITHUN 1111 1 • 11101,4 14 SSP,: 11163 111$ 1140 ND MH DS G.C.H. FOR PERMIT ONLY THIS DOCIAtONT HAS SEEN PM:PAM Kt MST ANSICAO011 AND 0 SM.= TO lenew AND MODI•ICATIONS ET SOVONENTAL AIM= FIRE PROTECTION PLANS, MECHANICAL SCHEDULE AND DETAILS CUSS S100 1■120604Stchq MOW. R.E +WE 'Or ii r BYERS M - 2 - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTIC+1—.---